blob: 9154b964523f7c23b20c4ebdbb5a58f47c619c63 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
403 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
404 {
405 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
406 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
408 pos.coladd = 0;
409#endif
410 }
411 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
412 }
413
414 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000415 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
417 return (int)col;
418}
419
420#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
421
422static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
423
424/*
425 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
426 */
427 static int
428cin_is_cinword(line)
429 char_u *line;
430{
431 char_u *cinw;
432 char_u *cinw_buf;
433 int cinw_len;
434 int retval = FALSE;
435 int len;
436
437 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
438 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
439 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
440 {
441 line = skipwhite(line);
442 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
443 {
444 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
445 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
446 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
447 {
448 retval = TRUE;
449 break;
450 }
451 }
452 vim_free(cinw_buf);
453 }
454 return retval;
455}
456#endif
457
458/*
459 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
460 *
461 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
462 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
463 *
464 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
465 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
466 * new line.
467 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
468 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
469 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
470 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
471 *
472 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
473 */
474 int
475open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
476 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
477 int flags;
478 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
479{
480 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
481 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
482 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
483 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
484 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
485 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
486 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
487 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
488 int n;
489 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
490 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
491#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
492 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
493 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
494 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
495 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
496#endif
497 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
498#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
499 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
500 char_u *p;
501#endif
502 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
503#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
504 pos_T *pos;
505#endif
506#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
507 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
508# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
509 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
510# endif
511 );
512 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
513 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
514#endif
515#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
516 int vreplace_mode;
517#endif
518 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
519 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
520
521 /*
522 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
523 */
524 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
525 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
526 return FALSE;
527
528#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
529 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
530 {
531 /*
532 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
533 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
534 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
535 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
536 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
537 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
538 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
539 */
540 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
541 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
542 else
543 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
544 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
545 goto theend;
546
547 /*
548 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
549 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
550 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
551 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
552 * etc) a bit later.
553 */
554 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
555 replace_push(NUL);
556 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
557 while (*p != NUL)
558 replace_push(*p++);
559 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
560 }
561#endif
562
563 if ((State & INSERT)
564#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
565 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
566#endif
567 )
568 {
569 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
570#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
571 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
572 {
573 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
574 first_char = *p;
575 }
576#endif
577#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
578 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
579#endif
580 saved_char = *p_extra;
581 *p_extra = NUL;
582 }
583
584 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
585#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
586 did_si = FALSE;
587#endif
588 ai_col = 0;
589
590 /*
591 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
592 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
593 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
594 */
595 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
596 trunc_line = TRUE;
597
598 /*
599 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
600 * indent to use for the new line.
601 */
602 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
603#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
604 || do_si
605#endif
606 )
607 {
608 /*
609 * count white space on current line
610 */
611 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
612 if (newindent == 0)
613 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
614
615#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
616 /*
617 * Do smart indenting.
618 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
619 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
620 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
621 * "if (condition) {"
622 */
623 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
624 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
625 {
626 char_u *ptr;
627 char_u last_char;
628
629 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
630 ptr = saved_line;
631# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
632 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
633 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
634 else
635 lead_len = 0;
636# endif
637 if (dir == FORWARD)
638 {
639 /*
640 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
641 * recognised as comments.
642 */
643 if (
644# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
645 lead_len == 0 &&
646# endif
647 ptr[0] == '#')
648 {
649 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
650 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
651 newindent = get_indent();
652 }
653# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
654 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
655 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
656 else
657 lead_len = 0;
658 if (lead_len > 0)
659 {
660 /*
661 * This case gets the following right:
662 * \*
663 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
664 * *\
665 * #define IN_THE_WAY
666 * This should line up here;
667 */
668 p = skipwhite(ptr);
669 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
670 p++;
671 if (p[0] == '*')
672 {
673 for (p++; *p; p++)
674 {
675 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
676 {
677 /*
678 * End of C comment, indent should line up
679 * with the line containing the start of
680 * the comment
681 */
682 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
683 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
684 {
685 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
686 newindent = get_indent();
687 }
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 else /* Not a comment line */
693# endif
694 {
695 /* Find last non-blank in line */
696 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
697 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
698 --p;
699 last_char = *p;
700
701 /*
702 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
703 */
704 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
705 {
706 if (p > ptr)
707 --p;
708 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
709 --p;
710 }
711 /*
712 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
713 * lines. eg:
714 * if (condition &&
715 * condition) {
716 * Should line up here!
717 * }
718 */
719 if (*p == ')')
720 {
721 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
722 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
723 {
724 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
725 newindent = get_indent();
726 ptr = ml_get_curline();
727 }
728 }
729 /*
730 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
731 * checking for "if" and the like.
732 */
733 if (last_char == '{')
734 {
735 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
736 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
737 }
738 /*
739 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
740 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
741 * '}'.
742 */
743 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
744 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
745 did_si = TRUE;
746 }
747 }
748 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
749 {
750 /*
751 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
752 * recognised as comments.
753 */
754 if (
755# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
756 lead_len == 0 &&
757# endif
758 ptr[0] == '#')
759 {
760 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
761
762 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
763 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
764 {
765 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
766 was_backslashed = TRUE;
767 else
768 was_backslashed = FALSE;
769 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
770 }
771 if (was_backslashed)
772 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
773 else
774 newindent = get_indent();
775 }
776 p = skipwhite(ptr);
777 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
778 did_si = TRUE;
779 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
780 can_si_back = TRUE;
781 }
782 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
783 }
784 if (do_si)
785 can_si = TRUE;
786#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
787
788 did_ai = TRUE;
789 }
790
791#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
792 /*
793 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
794 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
795 */
796 end_comment_pending = NUL;
797 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
798 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
799 else
800 lead_len = 0;
801 if (lead_len > 0)
802 {
803 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
804 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
805 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
806 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
807 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
808 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
809 int current_flag;
810 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
811 char_u *p2;
812
813 /*
814 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
815 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
816 */
817 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
818 {
819 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
820 {
821 require_blank = TRUE;
822 continue;
823 }
824 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
825 {
826 current_flag = *p;
827 if (*p == COM_START)
828 {
829 /*
830 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
831 */
832 if (dir == BACKWARD)
833 {
834 lead_len = 0;
835 break;
836 }
837
838 /* find start of middle part */
839 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
840 require_blank = FALSE;
841 }
842
843 /*
844 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
845 */
846 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
847 {
848 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
849 require_blank = TRUE;
850 ++p;
851 }
852 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
853
854 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
855 {
856 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
857 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
858 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
859 ++p;
860 }
861 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
862
863 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
864 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
865
866 /*
867 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
868 * the comment leader.
869 */
870 if (dir == FORWARD)
871 {
872 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
873 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
874 {
875 comment_end = p;
876 lead_len = 0;
877 break;
878 }
879 }
880
881 /*
882 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
883 */
884 if (lead_len > 0)
885 {
886 if (current_flag == COM_START)
887 {
888 lead_repl = lead_middle;
889 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
890 }
891
892 /*
893 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
894 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
895 * comment leader on the next line.
896 */
897 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
898 && ((p_extra != NULL
899 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
900 || (p_extra == NULL
901 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
902 || require_blank))
903 extra_space = TRUE;
904 }
905 break;
906 }
907 if (*p == COM_END)
908 {
909 /*
910 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
911 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
912 * start (for C-comments).
913 */
914 if (dir == FORWARD)
915 {
916 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
917 lead_len = 0;
918 break;
919 }
920
921 /*
922 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
923 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
924 */
925 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
926 --p;
927 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
928 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
929 ;
930 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
931
932 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
933 * the comment-end */
934 extra_space = TRUE;
935
936 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
937 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
938 {
939 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
940 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
941 }
942 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
943 {
944 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
945 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
946 p2++;
947 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
948 }
949 break;
950 }
951 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
952 {
953 /*
954 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
955 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
956 */
957 if (dir == BACKWARD)
958 lead_len = 0;
959 else
960 {
961 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
962 lead_repl_len = 0;
963 }
964 break;
965 }
966 }
967 if (lead_len)
968 {
969 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
970 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
971 extra_len + 1);
972 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
973
974 if (leader == NULL)
975 lead_len = 0;
976 else
977 {
978 STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
979 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
1075 l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 int l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
2185 count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002464}
2465
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002466static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2467static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2469
2470/*
2471 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2472 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2473 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2474 * - invalidates cached values
2475 */
2476 void
2477changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2478 linenr_T lnum;
2479 colnr_T col;
2480{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002481 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002482 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002483
2484#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2485 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2486 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2487 {
2488 win_T *wp;
2489 linenr_T wlnum;
2490
2491 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2492 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2493 {
2494 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2495 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2496 if (wlnum > 0)
2497 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2498 }
2499 }
2500#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002501}
2502
2503 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002504changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2505 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506 linenr_T lnum;
2507{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002508 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002509 {
2510 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002511 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2512 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2513 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2514 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515 }
2516 else
2517 {
2518 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002519 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2520 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2521 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2522 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002523 }
2524}
2525
2526/*
2527 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2528 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2529 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2530 */
2531 void
2532appended_lines(lnum, count)
2533 linenr_T lnum;
2534 long count;
2535{
2536 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2537}
2538
2539/*
2540 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2541 */
2542 void
2543appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2544 linenr_T lnum;
2545 long count;
2546{
2547 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2548 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2549}
2550
2551/*
2552 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2553 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2554 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2555 */
2556 void
2557deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2558 linenr_T lnum;
2559 long count;
2560{
2561 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2562}
2563
2564/*
2565 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2566 */
2567 void
2568deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2569 linenr_T lnum;
2570 long count;
2571{
2572 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2573 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2574}
2575
2576/*
2577 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2578 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2579 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2580 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2581 * - invalidate cached values
2582 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2583 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2584 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2585 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2586 */
2587 void
2588changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2589 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2590 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2591 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2592 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2593{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002594 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2595
2596#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2597 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2598 {
2599 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2600 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2601 * displaying. */
2602 win_T *wp;
2603 linenr_T wlnum;
2604
2605 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2606 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2607 {
2608 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2609 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2610 if (wlnum > 0)
2611 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2612 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2613 }
2614 }
2615#endif
2616
2617 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2618}
2619
2620 static void
2621changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2622 buf_T *buf;
2623 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2624 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2625 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2626{
2627 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628 {
2629 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002630 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2631 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2632 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002633 {
2634 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002635 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2636 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2637 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002638 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002639 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2640 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2641 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002642 }
2643 else
2644 {
2645 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002646 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2647 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2648 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2649 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002650 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651}
2652
2653 static void
2654changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2655 linenr_T lnum;
2656 colnr_T col;
2657 linenr_T lnume;
2658 long xtra;
2659{
2660 win_T *wp;
2661 int i;
2662#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2663 int cols;
2664 pos_T *p;
2665 int add;
2666#endif
2667
2668 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2669 changed();
2670
2671 /* set the '. mark */
2672 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2673 {
2674 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2676
2677#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2678 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2679 * don't have an entry yet. */
2680 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2681 {
2682 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2683 add = TRUE;
2684 else
2685 {
2686 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2687 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2688 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2689 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2690 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2691 add = TRUE;
2692 else
2693 {
2694 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2695 if (cols == 0)
2696 cols = 79;
2697 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2698 }
2699 }
2700 if (add)
2701 {
2702 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2703 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2704 * position in the changelist. */
2705 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2706
2707 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2708 {
2709 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2710 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2711 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2712 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2713 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2714 {
2715 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2716 * this buffer. */
2717 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2718 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2719 }
2720 }
2721 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2722 {
2723 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2724 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2725 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2726 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2727 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2728 }
2729 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2730 }
2731 }
2732 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2733 curbuf->b_last_change;
2734 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2735 * takes you back to it. */
2736 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2737#endif
2738 }
2739
2740 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2741 {
2742 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2743 {
2744 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2745 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2746 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2747
2748 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2749 * values for the cursor. */
2750#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2751 /*
2752 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2753 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2754 */
2755 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2756
2757 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2758 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2759 * might be displayed differently.
2760 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2761 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2762 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2763 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2764 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2765 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2766 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2767 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2768
2769 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2770 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2771 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2772 {
2773 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2774 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2775 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2776 }
2777#endif
2778
2779 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2780 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2781 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2782 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2783 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2784 {
2785 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2786 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2787 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2788 }
2789
2790 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2791 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2792 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2793 * after the change. */
2794 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2795 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2796 {
2797 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2798 {
2799 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2800 {
2801 /* line included in change */
2802 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2803 }
2804 else if (xtra != 0)
2805 {
2806 /* line below change */
2807 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2808#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2809 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2810#endif
2811 }
2812 }
2813#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2814 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2815 {
2816 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2817 * may need to be redrawn */
2818 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2819 }
2820#endif
2821 }
2822 }
2823 }
2824
2825 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2826 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2827 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2828 must_redraw = VALID;
2829}
2830
2831/*
2832 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2833 */
2834 void
2835unchanged(buf, ff)
2836 buf_T *buf;
2837 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2838{
2839 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2840 {
2841 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002842 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843 if (ff)
2844 save_file_ff(buf);
2845#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2846 check_status(buf);
2847#endif
2848#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2849 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2850#endif
2851 }
2852 ++buf->b_changedtick;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002853#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2854 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2855#endif
2856}
2857
2858#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2859/*
2860 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2861 * need to be updated
2862 */
2863 void
2864check_status(buf)
2865 buf_T *buf;
2866{
2867 win_T *wp;
2868
2869 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2870 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2871 {
2872 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2873 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2874 must_redraw = VALID;
2875 }
2876}
2877#endif
2878
2879/*
2880 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2881 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2882 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2883 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2884 * will be TRUE.
2885 */
2886 void
2887change_warning(col)
2888 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2889 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2890{
2891 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2892 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2893#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2894 && !autocmd_busy
2895#endif
2896 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2897 {
2898#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2899 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2900 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2901 return;
2902#endif
2903 /*
2904 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2905 * be after the mode message.
2906 */
2907 msg_start();
2908 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2909 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002910 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2912 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2913 msg_clr_eos();
2914 (void)msg_end();
2915 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2916 {
2917 out_flush();
2918 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2919 }
2920 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2921 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2922 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2923 showmode();
2924 }
2925}
2926
2927/*
2928 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2929 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2930 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2931 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2932 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2933 *
2934 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2935 */
2936 int
2937ask_yesno(str, direct)
2938 char_u *str;
2939 int direct;
2940{
2941 int r = ' ';
2942 int save_State = State;
2943
2944 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2945 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2946 ++no_wait_return;
2947#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2948 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2949#endif
2950 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2951#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2952 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2953#endif
2954 ++no_mapping;
2955 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2956
2957 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2958 {
2959 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2960 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2961 if (direct)
2962 r = get_keystroke();
2963 else
2964 r = safe_vgetc();
2965 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2966 r = 'n';
2967 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2968 out_flush();
2969 }
2970 --no_wait_return;
2971 State = save_State;
2972#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2973 setmouse();
2974#endif
2975 --no_mapping;
2976 --allow_keys;
2977
2978 return r;
2979}
2980
2981/*
2982 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2983 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2984 * button (used at the more prompt).
2985 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2986 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2987 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2988 */
2989 int
2990get_keystroke()
2991{
2992#define CBUFLEN 151
2993 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2994 int len = 0;
2995 int n;
2996 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2997
2998 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
2999 for (;;)
3000 {
3001 cursor_on();
3002 out_flush();
3003
3004 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3005 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3006 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3007 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3008 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3009 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3010 if (n > 0)
3011 {
3012 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3013 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3014 len += n;
3015 }
3016
3017 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3018 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3019 continue;
3020 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3021 if (n > 0)
3022 len = n;
3023 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3024 continue;
3025
3026 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3027 n = buf[0];
3028 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3029 {
3030 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3031 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3032 || n == K_IGNORE
3033#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3034 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3035 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3036 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3037 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3038 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3039 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3040 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3041 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3042 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3043 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3044 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3045 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3046 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3047 || n == K_X1DRAG
3048 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3049 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3050 || n == K_X2DRAG
3051 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3052# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3053 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3054 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3055# endif
3056#endif
3057 )
3058 {
3059 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3060 mod_mask = buf[2];
3061 len -= 3;
3062 if (len > 0)
3063 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3064 continue;
3065 }
3066 }
3067#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3068 if (has_mbyte)
3069 {
3070 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3071 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3072 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3073 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3074 }
3075#endif
3076#ifdef UNIX
3077 if (n == intr_char)
3078 n = ESC;
3079#endif
3080 break;
3081 }
3082
3083 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3084 return n;
3085}
3086
3087/*
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003088 * Get a number from the user.
3089 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003090 */
3091 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003092get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3093 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3094 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003095{
3096 int n = 0;
3097 int c;
3098
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003099 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3100 *mouse_used = FALSE;
3101
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003102 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3103 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3104 if (msg_silent != 0)
3105 return 0;
3106
3107#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3108 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3109#endif
3110 ++no_mapping;
3111 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3112 for (;;)
3113 {
3114 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3115 c = safe_vgetc();
3116 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3117 {
3118 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3119 msg_putchar(c);
3120 }
3121 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3122 {
3123 n /= 10;
3124 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3125 }
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003126#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3127 else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3128 {
3129 *mouse_used = TRUE;
3130 n = mouse_row + 1;
3131 break;
3132 }
3133#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003134 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3135 {
3136 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3137 if (!exmode_active)
3138 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3139 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3140 do_redraw = FALSE;
3141 break;
3142 }
3143 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3144 break;
3145 }
3146 --no_mapping;
3147 --allow_keys;
3148 return n;
3149}
3150
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003151/*
3152 * Ask the user to enter a number.
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003153 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3154 * the line number.
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003155 */
3156 int
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003157prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3158 int *mouse_used;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003159{
3160 int i;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003161 int save_cmdline_row;
3162 int save_State;
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003163
3164 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
Bram Moolenaar42eeac32005-06-29 22:40:58 +00003165 if (mouse_used != NULL)
3166 MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3167 else
3168 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003169
3170 /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3171 save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3172 cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3173 save_State = State;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003174 if (mouse_used == NULL)
3175 State = CMDLINE;
3176 else
3177 State = NORMAL;
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003178
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003179 i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3180 if (KeyTyped)
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003181 {
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003182 /* don't call wait_return() now */
3183 /* msg_putchar('\n'); */
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003184 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3185 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3186 msg_didany = FALSE;
3187 }
Bram Moolenaard857f0e2005-06-21 22:37:39 +00003188 else
3189 cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3190 State = save_State;
3191
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003192 return i;
3193}
3194
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003195 void
3196msgmore(n)
3197 long n;
3198{
3199 long pn;
3200
3201 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003202 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3203 return;
3204
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003205 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3206 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3207 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3208 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3209 return;
3210
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003211 if (n > 0)
3212 pn = n;
3213 else
3214 pn = -n;
3215
3216 if (pn > p_report)
3217 {
3218 if (pn == 1)
3219 {
3220 if (n > 0)
3221 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3222 else
3223 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3224 }
3225 else
3226 {
3227 if (n > 0)
3228 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3229 else
3230 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3231 }
3232 if (got_int)
3233 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3234 if (msg(msg_buf))
3235 {
3236 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3237 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003238 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003239 }
3240 }
3241}
3242
3243/*
3244 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3245 */
3246 void
3247beep_flush()
3248{
3249 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3250 {
3251 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3252 vim_beep();
3253 }
3254}
3255
3256/*
3257 * give a warning for an error
3258 */
3259 void
3260vim_beep()
3261{
3262 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3263 {
3264 if (p_vb
3265#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3266 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3267 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3268 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3269#endif
3270 )
3271 {
3272 out_str(T_VB);
3273 }
3274 else
3275 {
3276#ifdef MSDOS
3277 /*
3278 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3279 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3280 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3281 */
3282 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3283 {
3284 out_char(BELL);
3285 beep_count = 1;
3286 }
3287 else
3288 ++beep_count;
3289#else
3290 out_char(BELL);
3291#endif
3292 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003293
3294 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3295 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3296 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3297 {
3298 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3299 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3300 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003301 }
3302}
3303
3304/*
3305 * To get the "real" home directory:
3306 * - get value of $HOME
3307 * For Unix:
3308 * - go to that directory
3309 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3310 * This also works with mounts and links.
3311 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3312 */
3313static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3314
3315 void
3316init_homedir()
3317{
3318 char_u *var;
3319
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003320 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3321 vim_free(homedir);
3322 homedir = NULL;
3323
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003324#ifdef VMS
3325 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3326#else
3327 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3328#endif
3329
3330 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3331 var = NULL;
3332
3333#ifdef WIN3264
3334 /*
3335 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3336 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3337 * when $HOME is being set.
3338 */
3339 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3340 {
3341 char_u *p;
3342 char_u *exp;
3343
3344 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3345 if (p != NULL)
3346 {
3347 STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3348 NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3349 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3350 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3351 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3352 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003353 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003354 var = NameBuff;
3355 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3356 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3357 }
3358 }
3359 }
3360
3361 /*
3362 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3363 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3364 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3365 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3366 */
3367 if (var == NULL)
3368 {
3369 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3370
3371 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3372 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3373 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3374 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3375 {
3376 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3377 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3378 {
3379 var = NameBuff;
3380 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3381 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3382 }
3383 }
3384 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003385
3386# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3387 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3388 {
3389 int len;
3390 char_u *pp;
3391
3392 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3393 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3394 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3395 if (pp != NULL)
3396 {
3397 homedir = pp;
3398 return;
3399 }
3400 }
3401# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003402#endif
3403
3404#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3405 /*
3406 * Default home dir is C:/
3407 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3408 */
3409 if (var == NULL)
3410 var = "C:/";
3411#endif
3412 if (var != NULL)
3413 {
3414#ifdef UNIX
3415 /*
3416 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3417 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3418 */
3419 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3420 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3421 {
3422 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3423 var = IObuff;
3424 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3425 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3426 }
3427#endif
3428 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3429 }
3430}
3431
Bram Moolenaarf461c8e2005-06-25 23:04:51 +00003432#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3433 void
3434free_homedir()
3435{
3436 vim_free(homedir);
3437}
3438#endif
3439
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003440/*
3441 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3442 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3443 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3444 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3445 */
3446 void
3447expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3448 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3449 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3450 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3451{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003452 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003453}
3454
3455 void
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003456expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3457 char_u *srcp; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003458 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3459 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3460 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003461 char_u *startstr; /* start again after this (can be NULL) */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003462{
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003463 char_u *src;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003464 char_u *tail;
3465 int c;
3466 char_u *var;
3467 int copy_char;
3468 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3469 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003470 int startstr_len = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003471
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003472 if (startstr != NULL)
3473 startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr);
3474
3475 src = skipwhite(srcp);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003476 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3477 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3478 {
3479 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003480 if ((*src == '$'
3481#ifdef VMS
3482 && at_start
3483#endif
3484 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003485#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3486 || *src == '%'
3487#endif
3488 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3489 {
3490 mustfree = FALSE;
3491
3492 /*
3493 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3494 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3495 */
3496 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3497 {
3498 tail = src + 1;
3499 var = dst;
3500 c = dstlen - 1;
3501
3502#ifdef UNIX
3503 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3504 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3505 {
3506 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3507 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3508 *var++ = *tail++;
3509 }
3510 else
3511#endif
3512 {
3513 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3514#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3515 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3516#endif
3517 ))
3518 {
3519#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3520 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3521 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3522#else
3523 *var++ = *tail++;
3524#endif
3525 }
3526 }
3527
3528#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3529# ifdef UNIX
3530 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3531# else
3532 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3533# endif
3534 var = NULL;
3535 else
3536 {
3537# ifdef UNIX
3538 if (src[1] == '{')
3539# else
3540 if (*src == '%')
3541#endif
3542 ++tail;
3543#endif
3544 *var = NUL;
3545 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3546#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3547 }
3548#endif
3549 }
3550 /* home directory */
3551 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3552 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3553 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3554 {
3555 var = homedir;
3556 tail = src + 1;
3557 }
3558 else /* user directory */
3559 {
3560#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3561 /*
3562 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3563 */
3564 tail = src;
3565 var = dst;
3566 c = dstlen - 1;
3567 while ( c-- > 0
3568 && *tail
3569 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3570 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3571 *var++ = *tail++;
3572 *var = NUL;
3573# ifdef UNIX
3574 /*
3575 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3576 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3577 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3578 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3579 */
3580# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3581 {
3582 struct passwd *pw;
3583
3584 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3585 if (pw != NULL)
3586 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3587 else
3588 var = NULL;
3589 }
3590 if (var == NULL)
3591# endif
3592 {
3593 expand_T xpc;
3594
3595 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3596 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3597 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3598 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3599 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3600 mustfree = TRUE;
3601 }
3602
3603# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3604 /*
3605 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3606 * directories to search for the user account in.
3607 */
3608 {
3609 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3610 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3611 struct stat st;
3612
3613 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3614 next_path = paths;
3615 while (*next_path)
3616 {
3617 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3618 next_path++);
3619 if (*next_path)
3620 *next_path++ = NUL;
3621 STRCPY(test, path);
3622 STRCAT(test, "/");
3623 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3624 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3625 {
3626 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3627 STRCPY(var, test);
3628 mustfree = TRUE;
3629 break;
3630 }
3631 }
3632 }
3633# endif /* UNIX */
3634#else
3635 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3636 var = NULL;
3637 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3638#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3639 }
3640
3641#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3642 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3643 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3644 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3645 {
3646 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3647
3648 if (p != NULL)
3649 {
3650 if (mustfree)
3651 vim_free(var);
3652 var = p;
3653 mustfree = TRUE;
3654 forward_slash(var);
3655 }
3656 }
3657#endif
3658
3659 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3660 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3661 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3662 {
3663 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3664
3665 if (p != NULL)
3666 {
3667 if (mustfree)
3668 vim_free(var);
3669 var = p;
3670 mustfree = TRUE;
3671 }
3672 }
3673
3674 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3675 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3676 {
3677 STRCPY(dst, var);
3678 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003679 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003680 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3681 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003682 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003683#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3684 && dst[-1] != ':'
3685#endif
3686 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3687 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003688 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003689 src = tail;
3690 copy_char = FALSE;
3691 }
3692 if (mustfree)
3693 vim_free(var);
3694 }
3695
3696 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3697 {
3698 /*
3699 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3700 */
3701 at_start = FALSE;
3702 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3703 {
3704 *dst++ = *src++;
3705 --dstlen;
3706 }
3707 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3708 at_start = TRUE;
3709 *dst++ = *src++;
3710 --dstlen;
Bram Moolenaar24bbcfe2005-06-28 23:32:02 +00003711
3712 if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3713 && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3714 at_start = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003715 }
3716 }
3717 *dst = NUL;
3718}
3719
3720/*
3721 * Vim's version of getenv().
3722 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003723 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003724 */
3725 char_u *
3726vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3727 char_u *name;
3728 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3729{
3730 char_u *p;
3731 char_u *pend;
3732 int vimruntime;
3733
3734#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3735 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3736 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3737 return homedir;
3738#endif
3739
3740 p = mch_getenv(name);
3741 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3742 p = NULL;
3743
3744 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003745 {
3746#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3747 if (enc_utf8)
3748 {
3749 int len;
3750 char_u *pp;
3751
3752 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3753 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3754 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3755 if (pp != NULL)
3756 {
3757 p = pp;
3758 *mustfree = TRUE;
3759 }
3760 }
3761#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003762 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003763 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003764
3765 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3766 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3767 return NULL;
3768
3769 /*
3770 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3771 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3772 */
3773 if (vimruntime
3774#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3775 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3776#endif
3777 )
3778 {
3779 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3780 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3781 p = NULL;
3782 if (p != NULL)
3783 {
3784 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3785 if (p != NULL)
3786 *mustfree = TRUE;
3787 else
3788 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003789
3790#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3791 if (enc_utf8)
3792 {
3793 int len;
3794 char_u *pp;
3795
3796 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3797 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3798 * characters. */
3799 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3800 if (pp != NULL)
3801 {
3802 if (mustfree)
3803 vim_free(p);
3804 p = pp;
3805 *mustfree = TRUE;
3806 }
3807 }
3808#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003809 }
3810 }
3811
3812 /*
3813 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3814 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3815 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3816 */
3817 if (p == NULL)
3818 {
3819 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3820 p = p_hf;
3821#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3822 /*
3823 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3824 */
3825 else
3826 p = exe_name;
3827#endif
3828 if (p != NULL)
3829 {
3830 /* remove the file name */
3831 pend = gettail(p);
3832
3833 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3834 if (p == p_hf)
3835 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3836
3837#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3838# ifdef MACOS_X
3839 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3840 if (p == exe_name)
3841 {
3842 char_u *pend1;
3843 char_u *pend2;
3844
3845 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3846 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3847 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3848 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3849 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3850 if (pend2 == pend)
3851 pend = pend1;
3852 }
3853# endif
3854 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3855 if (p == exe_name)
3856 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3857#endif
3858
3859 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3860 if (!vimruntime)
3861 {
3862 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3863 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3864 }
3865
3866 /* remove trailing path separator */
3867#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3868 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3869 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003870 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003871 --pend;
3872#endif
3873
3874 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3875 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3876
3877 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3878 {
3879 vim_free(p);
3880 p = NULL;
3881 }
3882 else
3883 {
3884#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3885 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3886 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3887 {
3888 vim_free(p);
3889 p = pend;
3890 }
3891#endif
3892 *mustfree = TRUE;
3893 }
3894 }
3895 }
3896
3897#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3898 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3899 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3900 if (p == NULL)
3901 {
3902 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3903 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3904 {
3905 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3906 *mustfree = FALSE;
3907 }
3908 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3909 {
3910 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3911 *mustfree = TRUE;
3912 else
3913 {
3914 p = default_vim_dir;
3915 *mustfree = FALSE;
3916 }
3917 }
3918 }
3919#endif
3920
3921 /*
3922 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3923 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3924 */
3925 if (p != NULL)
3926 {
3927 if (vimruntime)
3928 {
3929 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3930 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3931#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3932 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003933 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003934
3935 if (buf != NULL)
3936 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003937 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3938 vim_free(buf);
3939 }
3940 }
3941#endif
3942 }
3943 else
3944 {
3945 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3946 didset_vim = TRUE;
3947 }
3948 }
3949 return p;
3950}
3951
3952/*
3953 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3954 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3955 */
3956 static char_u *
3957vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3958 char_u *vimdir;
3959{
3960 char_u *p;
3961
3962 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3963 return NULL;
3964 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3965 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3966 return p;
3967 vim_free(p);
3968 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3969 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3970 return p;
3971 vim_free(p);
3972 return NULL;
3973}
3974
3975/*
3976 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3977 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3978 */
3979 static char_u *
3980remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3981 char_u *p;
3982 char_u *pend;
3983 char_u *name;
3984{
3985 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3986 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3987
3988 if (newend >= p
3989 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003990 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003991 return newend;
3992 return pend;
3993}
3994
3995#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3996/*
3997 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3998 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3999 */
4000 static char_u *
4001remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
4002 char_u *p;
4003 char_u *pend;
4004 char_u *ext;
4005{
4006 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
4007 char_u *newend = pend - len;
4008
4009 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00004010 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
4011 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
4012 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004013 return newend;
4014 return pend;
4015}
4016#endif
4017
4018/*
4019 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4020 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4021 * again soon.
4022 */
4023 char_u *
4024expand_env_save(src)
4025 char_u *src;
4026{
4027 char_u *p;
4028
4029 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4030 if (p != NULL)
4031 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4032 return p;
4033}
4034
4035/*
4036 * Our portable version of setenv.
4037 */
4038 void
4039vim_setenv(name, val)
4040 char_u *name;
4041 char_u *val;
4042{
4043#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4044 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4045#else
4046 char_u *envbuf;
4047
4048 /*
4049 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4050 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
4051 */
4052 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4053 if (envbuf != NULL)
4054 {
4055 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4056 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4057 }
4058#endif
4059}
4060
4061#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4062/*
4063 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4064 */
4065/*ARGSUSED*/
4066 char_u *
4067get_env_name(xp, idx)
4068 expand_T *xp;
4069 int idx;
4070{
4071# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4072 /*
4073 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4074 */
4075 return NULL;
4076# else
4077# ifndef __WIN32__
4078 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4079 extern char **environ;
4080# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004081# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4082 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004083 char_u *str;
4084 int n;
4085
4086 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4087 if (str == NULL)
4088 return NULL;
4089
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004090 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004091 {
4092 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4093 break;
4094 name[n] = str[n];
4095 }
4096 name[n] = NUL;
4097 return name;
4098# endif
4099}
4100#endif
4101
4102/*
4103 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4104 * 'src'.
4105 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4106 */
4107 void
4108home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4109 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4110 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4111 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4112 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4113 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4114 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4115{
4116 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4117 size_t len;
4118 char_u *homedir_env;
4119 char_u *p;
4120
4121 if (src == NULL)
4122 {
4123 *dst = NUL;
4124 return;
4125 }
4126
4127 /*
4128 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4129 */
4130 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4131 {
4132 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4133 return;
4134 }
4135
4136 /*
4137 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4138 * "real" home directory.
4139 */
4140 if (homedir != NULL)
4141 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4142
4143#ifdef VMS
4144 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4145#else
4146 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4147#endif
4148
4149 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4150 homedir_env = NULL;
4151 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4152 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4153
4154 if (!one)
4155 src = skipwhite(src);
4156 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4157 {
4158 /*
4159 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4160 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4161 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4162 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4163 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4164 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4165 * er's home directory)).
4166 */
4167 p = homedir;
4168 len = dirlen;
4169 for (;;)
4170 {
4171 if ( len
4172 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4173 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4174 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4175 || src[len] == NUL))
4176 {
4177 src += len;
4178 if (--dstlen > 0)
4179 *dst++ = '~';
4180
4181 /*
4182 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4183 */
4184 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4185 *dst++ = '/';
4186 break;
4187 }
4188 if (p == homedir_env)
4189 break;
4190 p = homedir_env;
4191 len = envlen;
4192 }
4193
4194 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4195 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4196 *dst++ = *src++;
4197 /* skip separator */
4198 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4199 *dst++ = *src++;
4200 }
4201 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4202
4203 *dst = NUL;
4204}
4205
4206/*
4207 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4208 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4209 */
4210 char_u *
4211home_replace_save(buf, src)
4212 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4213 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4214{
4215 char_u *dst;
4216 unsigned len;
4217
4218 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4219 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4220 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4221 dst = alloc(len);
4222 if (dst != NULL)
4223 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4224 return dst;
4225}
4226
4227/*
4228 * Compare two file names and return:
4229 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4230 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4231 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4232 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4233 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4234 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4235 */
4236 int
4237fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4238 char_u *s1, *s2;
4239 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4240{
4241#ifdef UNIX
4242 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4243 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4244 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4245 struct stat st1, st2;
4246 int r1, r2;
4247
4248 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4249 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4250 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4251 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4252 {
4253 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4254 if (checkname)
4255 {
4256 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4257 return FPC_SAMEX;
4258 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4259 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4260 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4261 return FPC_SAMEX;
4262 }
4263 return FPC_NOTX;
4264 }
4265 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4266 return FPC_DIFFX;
4267 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4268 return FPC_SAME;
4269 return FPC_DIFF;
4270#else
4271 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4272 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4273 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4274 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4275 int r1, r2;
4276
4277 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4278 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4279 {
4280 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4281 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4282
4283 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4284 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4285 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4286
4287 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4288 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4289 {
4290 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4291 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4292 else
4293 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4294 }
4295 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4296 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4297 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4298 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4299 else
4300 retval = FPC_SAME;
4301 vim_free(exp1);
4302 }
4303 return retval;
4304#endif
4305}
4306
4307/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004308 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4309 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004310 */
4311 char_u *
4312gettail(fname)
4313 char_u *fname;
4314{
4315 char_u *p1, *p2;
4316
4317 if (fname == NULL)
4318 return (char_u *)"";
4319 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4320 {
4321 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4322 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004323 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004324 }
4325 return p1;
4326}
4327
4328/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004329 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4330 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4331 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4332 */
4333 char_u *
4334gettail_sep(fname)
4335 char_u *fname;
4336{
4337 char_u *p;
4338 char_u *t;
4339
4340 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4341 t = gettail(fname);
4342 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4343 --t;
4344#ifdef VMS
4345 /* path separator is part of the path */
4346 ++t;
4347#endif
4348 return t;
4349}
4350
4351/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004352 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4353 */
4354 char_u *
4355getnextcomp(fname)
4356 char_u *fname;
4357{
4358 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004359 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004360 if (*fname)
4361 ++fname;
4362 return fname;
4363}
4364
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004365/*
4366 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4367 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4368 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4369 */
4370 char_u *
4371get_past_head(path)
4372 char_u *path;
4373{
4374 char_u *retval;
4375
4376#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4377 /* may skip "c:" */
4378 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4379 retval = path + 2;
4380 else
4381 retval = path;
4382#else
4383# if defined(AMIGA)
4384 /* may skip "label:" */
4385 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4386 if (retval == NULL)
4387 retval = path;
4388# else /* Unix */
4389 retval = path;
4390# endif
4391#endif
4392
4393 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4394 ++retval;
4395
4396 return retval;
4397}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004398
4399/*
4400 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4401 */
4402 int
4403vim_ispathsep(c)
4404 int c;
4405{
4406#ifdef RISCOS
4407 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4408#else
4409# ifdef UNIX
4410 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4411# else
4412# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4413 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4414# else
4415# ifdef VMS
4416 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4417 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4418 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4419# else
4420# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4421 return (c == ':');
4422# else /* Amiga */
4423 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4424# endif
4425# endif /* VMS */
4426# endif
4427# endif
4428#endif /* RISC OS */
4429}
4430
4431#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4432/*
4433 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4434 */
4435 int
4436vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4437 int c;
4438{
4439#ifdef UNIX
4440 return (c == ':');
4441#else
4442 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4443#endif
4444}
4445#endif
4446
4447#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4448 || defined(PROTO)
4449/*
4450 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4451 */
4452 int
4453vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4454 char_u *x, *y;
4455{
4456 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4457}
4458
4459 int
4460vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4461 char_u *x, *y;
4462 size_t len;
4463{
4464 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4465 {
4466 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4467 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4468 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4469 break;
4470 ++x;
4471 ++y;
4472 --len;
4473 }
4474 if (len == 0)
4475 return 0;
4476 return (*x - *y);
4477}
4478#endif
4479
4480/*
4481 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4482 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4483 */
4484 char_u *
4485concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4486 char_u *fname1;
4487 char_u *fname2;
4488 int sep;
4489{
4490 char_u *dest;
4491
4492 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4493 if (dest != NULL)
4494 {
4495 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4496 if (sep)
4497 add_pathsep(dest);
4498 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4499 }
4500 return dest;
4501}
4502
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004503#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4504/*
4505 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4506 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4507 */
4508 char_u *
4509concat_str(str1, str2)
4510 char_u *str1;
4511 char_u *str2;
4512{
4513 char_u *dest;
4514 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4515
4516 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4517 if (dest != NULL)
4518 {
4519 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4520 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4521 }
4522 return dest;
4523}
4524#endif
4525
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004526/*
4527 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4528 * separator.
4529 */
4530 void
4531add_pathsep(p)
4532 char_u *p;
4533{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004534 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004535 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4536}
4537
4538/*
4539 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4540 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4541 */
4542 char_u *
4543FullName_save(fname, force)
4544 char_u *fname;
4545 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4546 like a full path name */
4547{
4548 char_u *buf;
4549 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4550
4551 if (fname == NULL)
4552 return NULL;
4553
4554 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4555 if (buf != NULL)
4556 {
4557 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4558 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4559 else
4560 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4561 vim_free(buf);
4562 }
4563 return new_fname;
4564}
4565
4566#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4567
4568static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4569
4570/*
4571 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4572 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4573 */
4574 pos_T *
4575find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4576 int ind_maxcomment;
4577{
4578 pos_T *pos;
4579 char_u *line;
4580 char_u *p;
4581
4582 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4583 return NULL;
4584
4585 /*
4586 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4587 */
4588 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4589 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4590 p = skip_string(p);
4591 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4592 return NULL;
4593 return pos;
4594}
4595
4596/*
4597 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4598 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4599 */
4600 static char_u *
4601skip_string(p)
4602 char_u *p;
4603{
4604 int i;
4605
4606 /*
4607 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4608 */
4609 for ( ; ; ++p)
4610 {
4611 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4612 {
4613 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4614 break;
4615 i = 2;
4616 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4617 {
4618 ++i;
4619 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4620 ++i;
4621 }
4622 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4623 {
4624 p += i;
4625 continue;
4626 }
4627 }
4628 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4629 {
4630 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4631 {
4632 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4633 ++p;
4634 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4635 break;
4636 }
4637 if (p[0] == '"')
4638 continue;
4639 }
4640 break; /* no string found */
4641 }
4642 if (!*p)
4643 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4644 return p;
4645}
4646#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4647
4648#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4649
4650/*
4651 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4652 */
4653 void
4654do_c_expr_indent()
4655{
4656# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4657 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4658 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4659 else
4660# endif
4661 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4662}
4663
4664/*
4665 * Functions for C-indenting.
4666 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4667 */
4668/*
4669 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4670 */
4671
4672static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4673static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4674static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4675static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4676static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4677static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4678static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4679static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4680static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4681static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4682static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4683static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4684static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4685static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4686static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4687static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4688static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4689static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4690static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4691static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4692static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4693static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4694static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4695static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4696static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4697static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4698static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4699static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4700static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4701static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4702
4703/*
4704 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4705 */
4706 static char_u *
4707cin_skipcomment(s)
4708 char_u *s;
4709{
4710 while (*s)
4711 {
4712 s = skipwhite(s);
4713 if (*s != '/')
4714 break;
4715 ++s;
4716 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4717 {
4718 s += STRLEN(s);
4719 break;
4720 }
4721 if (*s != '*')
4722 break;
4723 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4724 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4725 {
4726 s += 2;
4727 break;
4728 }
4729 }
4730 return s;
4731}
4732
4733/*
4734 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4735 * not considered code.
4736 */
4737 static int
4738cin_nocode(s)
4739 char_u *s;
4740{
4741 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4742}
4743
4744/*
4745 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4746 */
4747 static pos_T *
4748find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4749{
4750 static pos_T pos;
4751 char_u *line;
4752 char_u *p;
4753
4754 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4755 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4756 {
4757 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4758 p = skipwhite(line);
4759 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4760 {
4761 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4762 return &pos;
4763 }
4764 if (*p != NUL)
4765 break;
4766 }
4767 return NULL;
4768}
4769
4770/*
4771 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4772 */
4773 static int
4774cin_islabel_skip(s)
4775 char_u **s;
4776{
4777 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4778 return FALSE;
4779
4780 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4781 (*s)++;
4782
4783 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4784
4785 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4786 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4787}
4788
4789/*
4790 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4791 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4792 */
4793 int
4794cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4795 int ind_maxcomment;
4796{
4797 char_u *s;
4798
4799 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4800
4801 /*
4802 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4803 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4804 */
4805 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4806 return FALSE;
4807 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4808 return FALSE;
4809
4810 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4811 {
4812 /*
4813 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4814 * label.
4815 */
4816 pos_T cursor_save;
4817 pos_T *trypos;
4818 char_u *line;
4819
4820 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4821 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4822 {
4823 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4824
4825 /*
4826 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4827 */
4828 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4829 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4830 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4831
4832 line = ml_get_curline();
4833 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4834 continue;
4835 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4836 continue;
4837
4838 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4839 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4840 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4841 || cin_iscase(line)
4842 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4843 return TRUE;
4844 return FALSE;
4845 }
4846 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4847 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4848 }
4849 return FALSE;
4850}
4851
4852/*
4853 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4854 * Q&D-Implementation:
4855 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4856 */
4857 static int
4858cin_isinit(void)
4859{
4860 char_u *s;
4861
4862 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4863
4864 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4865 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4866
4867 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4868 return TRUE;
4869
4870 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4871 return TRUE;
4872
4873 return FALSE;
4874}
4875
4876/*
4877 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4878 */
4879 int
4880cin_iscase(s)
4881 char_u *s;
4882{
4883 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4884 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4885 {
4886 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4887 {
4888 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4889 if (*s == ':')
4890 {
4891 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4892 ++s;
4893 else
4894 return TRUE;
4895 }
4896 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4897 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4898 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4899 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4900 else if (*s == '"')
4901 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4902 }
4903 return FALSE;
4904 }
4905
4906 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4907 return TRUE;
4908 return FALSE;
4909}
4910
4911/*
4912 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4913 */
4914 static int
4915cin_isdefault(s)
4916 char_u *s;
4917{
4918 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4919 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4920 && s[1] != ':');
4921}
4922
4923/*
4924 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4925 */
4926 int
4927cin_isscopedecl(s)
4928 char_u *s;
4929{
4930 int i;
4931
4932 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4933 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4934 i = 6;
4935 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4936 i = 9;
4937 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4938 i = 7;
4939 else
4940 return FALSE;
4941 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4942}
4943
4944/*
4945 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4946 * Return NULL if not found.
4947 * case 234: a = b;
4948 * ^
4949 */
4950 static char_u *
4951after_label(l)
4952 char_u *l;
4953{
4954 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4955 {
4956 if (*l == ':')
4957 {
4958 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4959 ++l;
4960 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4961 break;
4962 }
4963 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4964 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4965 }
4966 if (*l == NUL)
4967 return NULL;
4968 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4969 if (*l == NUL)
4970 return NULL;
4971 return l;
4972}
4973
4974/*
4975 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4976 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4977 */
4978 static int
4979get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
4980 linenr_T lnum;
4981{
4982 char_u *l;
4983 pos_T fp;
4984 colnr_T col;
4985 char_u *p;
4986
4987 l = ml_get(lnum);
4988 p = after_label(l);
4989 if (p == NULL)
4990 return 0;
4991
4992 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4993 fp.lnum = lnum;
4994 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4995 return (int)col;
4996}
4997
4998/*
4999 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5000 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
5001 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5002 * ^
5003 */
5004 static int
5005skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5006 linenr_T lnum;
5007 char_u **pp;
5008 int ind_maxcomment;
5009{
5010 char_u *l;
5011 int amount;
5012 pos_T cursor_save;
5013
5014 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5015 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5016 l = ml_get_curline();
5017 /* XXX */
5018 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5019 {
5020 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5021 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5022 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
5023 l = ml_get_curline();
5024 }
5025 else
5026 {
5027 amount = get_indent();
5028 l = ml_get_curline();
5029 }
5030 *pp = l;
5031
5032 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5033 return amount;
5034}
5035
5036/*
5037 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5038 * int a, indent of "a"
5039 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
5040 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
5041 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5042 */
5043 static int
5044cin_first_id_amount()
5045{
5046 char_u *line, *p, *s;
5047 int len;
5048 pos_T fp;
5049 colnr_T col;
5050
5051 line = ml_get_curline();
5052 p = skipwhite(line);
5053 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5054 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5055 {
5056 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5057 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5058 }
5059 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5060 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5061 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5062 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5063 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5064 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5065 {
5066 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5067 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5068 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5069 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5070 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5071 p = s;
5072 }
5073 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5074 ;
5075 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5076 return 0;
5077
5078 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5079 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5080 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5081 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5082 return (int)col;
5083}
5084
5085/*
5086 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5087 * char *foo = "here";
5088 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5089 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5090 * foo = "asdf\
5091 * asdf\
5092 * here";
5093 */
5094 static int
5095cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5096 linenr_T lnum;
5097{
5098 char_u *line;
5099 char_u *s;
5100 colnr_T col;
5101 pos_T fp;
5102
5103 if (lnum > 1)
5104 {
5105 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5106 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5107 return -1;
5108 }
5109
5110 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5111 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5112 {
5113 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5114 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5115 else
5116 ++s;
5117 }
5118 if (*s != '=')
5119 return 0;
5120
5121 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5122 if (cin_nocode(s))
5123 return 0;
5124
5125 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5126 ++s;
5127
5128 fp.lnum = lnum;
5129 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5130 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5131 return (int)col;
5132}
5133
5134/*
5135 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5136 */
5137 static int
5138cin_ispreproc(s)
5139 char_u *s;
5140{
5141 s = skipwhite(s);
5142 if (*s == '#')
5143 return TRUE;
5144 return FALSE;
5145}
5146
5147/*
5148 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5149 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5150 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5151 */
5152 static int
5153cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5154 char_u **pp;
5155 linenr_T *lnump;
5156{
5157 char_u *line = *pp;
5158 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5159 int retval = FALSE;
5160
Bram Moolenaard8e9bb22005-07-09 21:14:46 +00005161 for (;;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005162 {
5163 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5164 {
5165 retval = TRUE;
5166 *lnump = lnum;
5167 break;
5168 }
5169 if (lnum == 1)
5170 break;
5171 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5172 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5173 break;
5174 }
5175
5176 if (lnum != *lnump)
5177 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5178 return retval;
5179}
5180
5181/*
5182 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5183 */
5184 static int
5185cin_iscomment(p)
5186 char_u *p;
5187{
5188 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5189}
5190
5191/*
5192 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5193 */
5194 static int
5195cin_islinecomment(p)
5196 char_u *p;
5197{
5198 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5199}
5200
5201/*
5202 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5203 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5204 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5205 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5206 */
5207 static int
5208cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5209 char_u *s;
5210 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5211 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5212{
5213 char_u found_start = 0;
5214
5215 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5216
5217 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5218 found_start = *s;
5219
5220 while (*s)
5221 {
5222 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5223 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5224 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5225 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5226 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5227 return *s;
5228
5229 if (*s)
5230 s++;
5231 }
5232 return found_start;
5233}
5234
5235/*
5236 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5237 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5238 * no semicolons anywhere.
5239 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5240 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5241 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5242 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5243 */
5244 static int
5245cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5246 char_u **sp;
5247 linenr_T first_lnum;
5248{
5249 char_u *s;
5250 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5251 int retval = FALSE;
5252
5253 if (sp == NULL)
5254 s = ml_get(lnum);
5255 else
5256 s = *sp;
5257
5258 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5259 {
5260 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5261 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5262 else
5263 ++s;
5264 }
5265 if (*s != '(')
5266 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5267
5268 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5269 {
5270 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5271 {
5272 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5273 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5274 * #if defined(x) && \
5275 * defined(y)
5276 */
5277 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5278 s = ml_get(lnum);
5279 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5280 retval = TRUE;
5281 goto done;
5282 }
5283 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5284 {
5285 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5286 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5287 break;
5288
5289 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5290 }
5291 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5292 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5293 else
5294 ++s;
5295 }
5296
5297done:
5298 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5299 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5300
5301 return retval;
5302}
5303
5304 static int
5305cin_isif(p)
5306 char_u *p;
5307{
5308 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5309}
5310
5311 static int
5312cin_iselse(p)
5313 char_u *p;
5314{
5315 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5316 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5317 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5318}
5319
5320 static int
5321cin_isdo(p)
5322 char_u *p;
5323{
5324 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5325}
5326
5327/*
5328 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5329 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5330 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5331 */
5332 static int
5333cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5334 char_u *p;
5335 linenr_T lnum;
5336 int ind_maxparen;
5337{
5338 pos_T cursor_save;
5339 pos_T *trypos;
5340 int retval = FALSE;
5341
5342 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5343 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5344 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5345 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5346 {
5347 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5348 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5349 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5350 p = ml_get_curline();
5351 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5352 {
5353 ++p;
5354 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5355 }
5356 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5357 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5358 retval = TRUE;
5359 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5360 }
5361 return retval;
5362}
5363
5364 static int
5365cin_isbreak(p)
5366 char_u *p;
5367{
5368 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5369}
5370
5371/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5372 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5373 *
5374 * class MyClass :
5375 * baseClass <-- here
5376 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5377 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5378 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5379 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5380 */
5381 static int
5382cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5383 char_u *line;
5384 colnr_T *col;
5385{
5386 char_u *s;
5387 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5388
5389 *col = 0;
5390
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005391 s = skipwhite(line);
5392 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5393 return FALSE;
5394 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005395 if (*s == NUL)
5396 return FALSE;
5397
5398 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5399
5400 while(*s != NUL)
5401 {
5402 if (s[0] == ':')
5403 {
5404 if (s[1] == ':')
5405 {
5406 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5407 * initialization any more */
5408 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5409 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5410 }
5411 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5412 {
5413 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5414 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5415 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5416 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5417 *col = 0;
5418 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5419 }
5420 else
5421 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5422 }
5423 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5424 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5425 {
5426 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5427 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5428
5429 if (*s == 'c')
5430 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5431 else
5432 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5433 }
5434 else
5435 {
5436 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5437 {
5438 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5439 }
5440 else if (s[0] == ')')
5441 {
5442 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5443 * something like "):" */
5444 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5445 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5446 }
5447 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5448 {
5449 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5450 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5451 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5452 }
5453 else if (*col == 0)
5454 {
5455 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5456 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5457
5458 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5459 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5460 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5461 }
5462
5463 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5464 }
5465 }
5466
5467 return cpp_base_class;
5468}
5469
5470/*
5471 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5472 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5473 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5474 */
5475 static int
5476cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5477 char_u *s;
5478 char_u *find;
5479 char_u *ignore;
5480{
5481 char_u *p = s;
5482 char_u *r;
5483 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5484
5485 while (*p != NUL)
5486 {
5487 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5488 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5489 {
5490 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5491 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5492 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5493 if (cin_nocode(r))
5494 return TRUE;
5495 }
5496 if (*p != NUL)
5497 ++p;
5498 }
5499 return FALSE;
5500}
5501
5502/*
5503 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5504 * Return the column found.
5505 */
5506 static int
5507cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5508 pos_T *trypos;
5509{
5510 char_u *line;
5511 char_u *p;
5512
5513 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5514 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5515 {
5516 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5517 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5518 else
5519 {
5520 p = skip_string(p);
5521 ++p;
5522 }
5523 }
5524 return (int)(p - line);
5525}
5526
5527/*
5528 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5529 * Return NULL if no match found.
5530 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5531 * work. */
5532/* foo() */
5533/* { */
5534/* } */
5535
5536 static pos_T *
5537find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5538 int ind_maxcomment;
5539{
5540 pos_T cursor_save;
5541 pos_T *trypos;
5542 pos_T *pos;
5543 static pos_T pos_copy;
5544
5545 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5546 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5547 {
5548 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5549 trypos = &pos_copy;
5550 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5551 pos = NULL;
5552 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5553 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5554 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5555 break;
5556 if (pos != NULL)
5557 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5558 }
5559 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5560 return trypos;
5561}
5562
5563/*
5564 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5565 * Return NULL of no match found.
5566 */
5567 static pos_T *
5568find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5569 int ind_maxparen;
5570 int ind_maxcomment;
5571{
5572 pos_T cursor_save;
5573 pos_T *trypos;
5574 static pos_T pos_copy;
5575
5576 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5577 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5578 {
5579 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5580 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5581 trypos = NULL;
5582 else
5583 {
5584 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5585 trypos = &pos_copy;
5586 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5587 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5588 trypos = NULL;
5589 }
5590 }
5591 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5592 return trypos;
5593}
5594
5595/*
5596 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5597 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5598 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5599 * looking a few lines further.
5600 */
5601 static int
5602corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5603 int ind_maxparen;
5604 pos_T *startpos;
5605{
5606 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5607
5608 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5609 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5610 return ind_maxparen;
5611}
5612
5613/*
5614 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5615 * line "l".
5616 */
5617 static int
5618find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5619 char_u *l;
5620 int start, end;
5621{
5622 int i;
5623 int retval = FALSE;
5624 int open_count = 0;
5625
5626 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5627
5628 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5629 {
5630 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5631 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5632 if (l[i] == start)
5633 ++open_count;
5634 else if (l[i] == end)
5635 {
5636 if (open_count > 0)
5637 --open_count;
5638 else
5639 {
5640 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5641 retval = TRUE;
5642 }
5643 }
5644 }
5645 return retval;
5646}
5647
5648 int
5649get_c_indent()
5650{
5651 /*
5652 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5653 * block should be
5654 */
5655 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5656
5657 /*
5658 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5659 * line is imagined to be.
5660 */
5661 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5662
5663 /*
5664 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5665 * an opening brace.
5666 */
5667 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5668
5669 /*
5670 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5671 */
5672 int ind_first_open = 0;
5673
5674 /*
5675 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5676 * located
5677 */
5678 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5679
5680 /*
5681 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5682 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5683 * brace should be located
5684 */
5685 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5686
5687 /*
5688 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5689 * column is imagined to be
5690 */
5691 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5692
5693 /*
5694 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5695 */
5696 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5697
5698 /*
5699 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5700 */
5701 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5702
5703 /*
5704 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5705 */
5706 int ind_case_break = 0;
5707
5708 /*
5709 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5710 * should be located
5711 */
5712 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5713
5714 /*
5715 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5716 */
5717 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5718
5719 /*
5720 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5721 */
5722 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5723
5724 /*
5725 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5726 */
5727 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5728
5729 /*
5730 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5731 * should be indented
5732 */
5733 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5734
5735 /*
5736 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5737 * should be located
5738 */
5739 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5740
5741 /*
5742 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5743 */
5744 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5745
5746 /*
5747 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5748 * itself is also unclosed
5749 */
5750 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5751
5752 /*
5753 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5754 * unclosed parentheses.
5755 */
5756 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5757
5758 /*
5759 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5760 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5761 * context (for very long lines).
5762 */
5763 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5764
5765 /*
5766 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5767 * an unclosed parentheses.
5768 */
5769 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5770
5771 /*
5772 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5773 * opening parentheses.
5774 */
5775 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5776
5777 /*
5778 * Extra indent for comments.
5779 */
5780 int ind_comment = 0;
5781
5782 /*
5783 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5784 */
5785 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5786
5787 /*
5788 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5789 * after the comment opener.
5790 */
5791 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5792
5793 /*
5794 * max lines to search for an open paren
5795 */
5796 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5797
5798 /*
5799 * max lines to search for an open comment
5800 */
5801 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5802
5803 /*
5804 * handle braces for java code
5805 */
5806 int ind_java = 0;
5807
5808 /*
5809 * handle blocked cases correctly
5810 */
5811 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5812
5813 pos_T cur_curpos;
5814 int amount;
5815 int scope_amount;
5816 int cur_amount;
5817 colnr_T col;
5818 char_u *theline;
5819 char_u *linecopy;
5820 pos_T *trypos;
5821 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5822 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5823 char_u *start;
5824 int start_brace;
5825#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5826#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5827#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5828 linenr_T ourscope;
5829 char_u *l;
5830 char_u *look;
5831 char_u terminated;
5832 int lookfor;
5833#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5834#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5835#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5836#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5837#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5838#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5839#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5840#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5841#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5842#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5843#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5844
5845 int whilelevel;
5846 linenr_T lnum;
5847 char_u *options;
5848 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5849 int divider;
5850 int n;
5851 int iscase;
5852 int lookfor_break;
5853 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5854
5855 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5856 {
5857 l = options++;
5858 if (*options == '-')
5859 ++options;
5860 n = getdigits(&options);
5861 divider = 0;
5862 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5863 {
5864 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5865 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5866 {
5867 ++options;
5868 if (divider)
5869 divider *= 10;
5870 else
5871 divider = 10;
5872 }
5873 }
5874 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5875 {
5876 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5877 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5878 else
5879 {
5880 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5881 if (divider)
5882 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5883 }
5884 ++options;
5885 }
5886 if (l[1] == '-')
5887 n = -n;
5888 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5889 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5890 switch (*l)
5891 {
5892 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5893 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5894 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5895 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5896 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5897 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5898 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5899 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5900 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5901 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5902 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5903 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5904 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5905 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5906 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5907 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5908 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5909 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5910 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5911 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5912 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5913 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5914 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5915 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5916 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5917 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5918 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5919 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5920 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5921 }
5922 }
5923
5924 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5925 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5926
5927 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5928 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5929 * ml_get is valid! */
5930 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5931 if (linecopy == NULL)
5932 return 0;
5933
5934 /*
5935 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5936 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5937 * inserting new stuff.
5938 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5939 * check for that.
5940 */
5941 if ((State & INSERT)
5942 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5943 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5944 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5945
5946 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5947
5948 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5949
5950 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5951
5952 /*
5953 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5954 */
5955 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5956 {
5957 amount = 0;
5958 }
5959
5960 /*
5961 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5962 */
5963 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5964 {
5965 amount = 0;
5966 }
5967
5968 /*
5969 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5970 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5971 */
5972 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5973 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5974 {
5975 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5976 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5977 amount = col;
5978 }
5979
5980 /*
5981 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5982 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5983 */
5984 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5985 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5986 {
5987 int lead_start_len = 2;
5988 int lead_middle_len = 1;
5989 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
5990 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
5991 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
5992 char_u *p;
5993 int start_align = 0;
5994 int start_off = 0;
5995 int done = FALSE;
5996
5997 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5998 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5999 amount = col;
6000
6001 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6002 while (*p != NUL)
6003 {
6004 int align = 0;
6005 int off = 0;
6006 int what = 0;
6007
6008 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6009 {
6010 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6011 what = *p++;
6012 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6013 align = *p++;
6014 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6015 off = getdigits(&p);
6016 else
6017 ++p;
6018 }
6019
6020 if (*p == ':')
6021 ++p;
6022 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6023 if (what == COM_START)
6024 {
6025 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6026 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6027 start_off = off;
6028 start_align = align;
6029 }
6030 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6031 {
6032 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6033 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6034 }
6035 else if (what == COM_END)
6036 {
6037 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6038 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6039 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6040 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6041 {
6042 done = TRUE;
6043 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6044 {
6045 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6046 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
6047 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6048 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
6049 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6050 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6051 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6052 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6053 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6054 {
6055 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6056 break;
6057 }
6058 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6059 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6060 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6061 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6062 continue;
6063 }
6064 if (start_off != 0)
6065 amount += start_off;
6066 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006067 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6068 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006069 break;
6070 }
6071
6072 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6073 * with the middle comment */
6074 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6075 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6076 {
6077 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6078 /* XXX */
6079 if (off != 0)
6080 amount += off;
6081 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006082 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6083 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006084 done = TRUE;
6085 break;
6086 }
6087 }
6088 }
6089
6090 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6091 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6092 * with the first character of the comment text.
6093 */
6094 if (done)
6095 ;
6096 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6097 amount += 1;
6098 else
6099 {
6100 /*
6101 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6102 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6103 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6104 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6105 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6106 */
6107 amount = -1;
6108 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6109 {
6110 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6111 continue;
6112 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6113 break;
6114 }
6115 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6116 {
6117 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6118 {
6119 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6120 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6121 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6122 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6123 }
6124 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6125 amount = col;
6126 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6127 amount += ind_in_comment;
6128 }
6129 }
6130 }
6131
6132 /*
6133 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6134 */ /* XXX */
6135 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6136 && ind_java == 0)
6137 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6138 || trypos != NULL)
6139 {
6140 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6141 {
6142 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6143 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6144 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6145 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6146 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6147 trypos = NULL;
6148 else
6149 tryposBrace = NULL;
6150 }
6151
6152 if (trypos != NULL)
6153 {
6154 /*
6155 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6156 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6157 */
6158 amount = -1;
6159 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6160 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6161 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6162 {
6163 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6164 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6165 continue;
6166 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6167 continue;
6168 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6169
6170 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6171 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6172 {
6173 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6174 continue;
6175 }
6176
6177 /* XXX */
6178 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6179 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6180 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6181 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6182 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6183 {
6184 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6185
6186 if (theline[0] == ')')
6187 {
6188 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6189 cur_amount = amount;
6190 amount = -1;
6191 }
6192 break;
6193 }
6194 }
6195
6196 /*
6197 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6198 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6199 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6200 */
6201 if (amount == -1)
6202 {
6203 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6204 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6205 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6206 {
6207 /*
6208 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6209 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6210 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6211 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6212 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6213 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6214 * lines).
6215 */
6216 if (theline[0] != ')')
6217 {
6218 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6219 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6220 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6221 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6222 {
6223 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6224 * for each additional level */
6225 n = 1;
6226 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6227 {
6228 switch (l[col])
6229 {
6230 case '(':
6231 case '{': ++n;
6232 break;
6233
6234 case ')':
6235 case '}': if (n > 1)
6236 --n;
6237 break;
6238 }
6239 }
6240
6241 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6242 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6243 }
6244 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6245 our_paren_pos.col++;
6246 else
6247 {
6248 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6249 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6250 col++;
6251 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6252 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6253 else
6254 our_paren_pos.col++;
6255 }
6256 }
6257
6258 /*
6259 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6260 * if we did the above "if".
6261 */
6262 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6263 {
6264 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6265 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6266 cur_amount = col;
6267 }
6268 }
6269
6270 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6271 {
6272 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6273 }
6274 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6275 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6276 {
6277 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6278 amount = cur_amount;
6279 }
6280 else
6281 {
6282 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6283 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6284 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6285 {
6286 --our_paren_pos.col;
6287 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6288 {
6289 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6290 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6291 break;
6292 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6293 col = MAXCOL;
6294 break;
6295 }
6296 }
6297
6298 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6299 * braces */
6300 if (col == MAXCOL)
6301 amount += ind_unclosed;
6302 else
6303 {
6304 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6305 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6306 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6307 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6308 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6309 else
6310 amount += ind_unclosed;
6311 }
6312 /*
6313 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6314 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6315 * lines:
6316 * func_long_name( if (x
6317 * arg && yy
6318 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6319 */
6320 if (cur_amount < amount)
6321 amount = cur_amount;
6322 }
6323 }
6324
6325 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6326 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6327 amount += ind_comment;
6328 }
6329
6330 /*
6331 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6332 */
6333 else
6334 {
6335 trypos = tryposBrace;
6336
6337 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6338 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6339
6340 /*
6341 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6342 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6343 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6344 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6345 */
6346 look = skipwhite(start);
6347 if (*look == '{')
6348 {
6349 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6350 amount = col;
6351 if (*start == '{')
6352 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6353 else
6354 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6355 }
6356 else
6357 {
6358 /*
6359 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6360 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6361 */
6362 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6363
6364 /*
6365 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6366 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6367 */
6368 lnum = ourscope;
6369 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6370 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6371 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6372 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6373
6374 /*
6375 * It could have been something like
6376 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6377 * ldfd) {
6378 * }
6379 */
6380 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6381 amount = get_indent();
6382 else
6383 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6384
6385 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6386 }
6387
6388 /*
6389 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6390 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6391 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6392 */
6393 if (theline[0] == '}')
6394 {
6395 /*
6396 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6397 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6398 */
6399 amount += ind_close_extra;
6400 }
6401 else
6402 {
6403 /*
6404 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6405 * to match it with.
6406 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6407 * to match it with.
6408 */
6409 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6410 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6411 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6412 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6413 /* XXX */
6414 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6415 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6416 {
6417 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6418 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6419 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6420 {
6421 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6422 goto theend;
6423 }
6424 }
6425
6426 /*
6427 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6428 * failed to find a matching "if").
6429 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6430 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6431 */
6432
6433 /*
6434 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6435 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6436 * location for ind_open_extra.
6437 */
6438
6439 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6440 {
6441 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6442 }
6443 else
6444 {
6445 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6446 amount += ind_open_imag;
6447 else
6448 {
6449 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6450 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6451 if (amount < 0)
6452 amount = 0;
6453 }
6454 }
6455
6456 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6457
6458 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6459 {
6460 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6461 amount += ind_case;
6462 }
6463 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6464 {
6465 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6466 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6467 }
6468 else
6469 {
6470 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6471 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6472
6473 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6474 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6475 }
6476 scope_amount = amount;
6477 whilelevel = 0;
6478
6479 /*
6480 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6481 * with that.
6482 *
6483 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6484 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6485 * that opens the block.
6486 */
6487 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6488 for (;;)
6489 {
6490 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6491 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6492
6493 /*
6494 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6495 * up with it.
6496 */
6497 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6498 {
6499 /* we reached end of scope:
6500 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6501 * go further back:
6502 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6503 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6504 * declaration:
6505 * int x,
6506 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6507 */
6508 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6509 {
6510 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6511 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6512 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6513 {
6514 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6515 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6516 * initialization) */
6517 if (cont_amount > 0)
6518 amount = cont_amount;
6519 else
6520 amount += ind_continuation;
6521 break;
6522 }
6523
6524 l = ml_get_curline();
6525
6526 /*
6527 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6528 * comment.
6529 */
6530 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6531 if (trypos != NULL)
6532 {
6533 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6534 continue;
6535 }
6536
6537 /*
6538 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6539 */
6540 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6541 continue;
6542
6543 if (cin_nocode(l))
6544 continue;
6545
6546 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6547
6548 /*
6549 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6550 * function declaration, we are done
6551 * (it's a variable declaration).
6552 */
6553 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6554 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6555 {
6556 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6557 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6558 * don't add extra indent.
6559 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6560 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6561 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6562 */
6563 if (terminated == ',')
6564 break;
6565
6566 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6567 * we are done.
6568 */
6569 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6570 break;
6571
6572 /* nothing useful found */
6573 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6574 continue;
6575 }
6576
6577 if (terminated != ';')
6578 {
6579 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6580 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6581 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6582 */ /* XXX */
6583 trypos = NULL;
6584 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6585 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6586 ind_maxcomment);
6587
6588 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6589 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6590
6591 if (trypos != NULL)
6592 {
6593 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6594 continue;
6595 }
6596 }
6597
6598 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6599 * like in
6600 * int a,
6601 * b;
6602 */
6603 if (cont_amount > 0)
6604 amount = cont_amount;
6605 else
6606 amount += ind_continuation;
6607 }
6608 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6609 {
6610 if (cont_amount > 0)
6611 amount = cont_amount;
6612 else
6613 amount += ind_continuation;
6614 }
6615 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6616 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6617 {
6618 amount = scope_amount;
6619 if (theline[0] == '{')
6620 amount += ind_open_extra;
6621 }
6622 break;
6623 }
6624
6625 /*
6626 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6627 */ /* XXX */
6628 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6629 {
6630 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6631 continue;
6632 }
6633
6634 l = ml_get_curline();
6635
6636 /*
6637 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6638 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6639 */
6640 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6641 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6642 {
6643 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6644 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6645 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6646 break;
6647
6648 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6649 * labels. */
6650 if (whilelevel > 0)
6651 continue;
6652
6653 /*
6654 * case xx:
6655 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6656 *-> here;
6657 */
6658 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6659 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6660 {
6661 if (cont_amount > 0)
6662 amount = cont_amount;
6663 else
6664 amount += ind_continuation;
6665 break;
6666 }
6667
6668 /*
6669 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6670 * x = 333;
6671 * case yy:
6672 */
6673 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6674 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6675 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6676 {
6677 /*
6678 * Check that this case label is not for another
6679 * switch()
6680 */ /* XXX */
6681 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6682 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6683 {
6684 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6685 break;
6686 }
6687 continue;
6688 }
6689
6690 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6691
6692 /*
6693 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6694 * y = y + 1;
6695 * -> s = 99;
6696 *
6697 * case xx:
6698 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6699 * y = y + 1;
6700 * -> s = 99;
6701 */
6702 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6703 {
6704 if (n)
6705 amount = n;
6706
6707 if (!lookfor_break)
6708 break;
6709 }
6710
6711 /*
6712 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6713 * -> y = y + 1;
6714 *
6715 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6716 * -> y = y + 1;
6717 */
6718 if (n)
6719 {
6720 amount = n;
6721 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6722 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6723 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6724 break;
6725 }
6726
6727 /*
6728 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6729 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6730 * switch label.
6731 * break; <- may line up with this line
6732 * case xx:
6733 * -> y = 1;
6734 */
6735 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6736 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6737 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6738 continue;
6739 }
6740
6741 /*
6742 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6743 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6744 */
6745 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6746 {
6747 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6748 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6749 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6750 continue;
6751 }
6752
6753 /*
6754 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6755 */
6756 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6757 {
6758 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6759 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6760 continue;
6761 }
6762
6763 /*
6764 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6765 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6766 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6767 * unlocked it)
6768 */
6769 l = ml_get_curline();
6770 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6771 || cin_nocode(l))
6772 continue;
6773
6774 /*
6775 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6776 * constructor initialization?
6777 */ /* XXX */
6778 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6779 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6780 {
6781 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6782 {
6783 if (cont_amount > 0)
6784 amount = cont_amount;
6785 else
6786 amount += ind_continuation;
6787 }
6788 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6789 {
6790 amount = get_indent();
6791 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6792 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6793 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6794 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6795 if (theline[0] != '{')
6796 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6797 }
6798 else
6799 {
6800 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6801 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6802 amount = (int)col;
6803 }
6804 break;
6805 }
6806 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6807 {
6808 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6809 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6810 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6811 break;
6812 else
6813 continue;
6814 }
6815
6816 /*
6817 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6818 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6819 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6820 * 123,
6821 * sizeof
6822 * here
6823 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6824 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6825 * (indented).
6826 */
6827 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6828
6829 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6830 && terminated == ','))
6831 {
6832 /*
6833 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6834 * go back to the line that starts it so
6835 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6836 * if ( foo &&
6837 * bar )
6838 */
6839 /*
6840 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6841 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6842 */
6843 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6844 trypos = find_match_paren(
6845 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6846 ind_maxcomment);
6847
6848 /*
6849 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6850 * braces.
6851 */
6852 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6853 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6854
6855 if (trypos != NULL)
6856 {
6857 /*
6858 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6859 * handled above.
6860 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6861 * asdf)
6862 */
6863 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6864 l = ml_get_curline();
6865 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6866 {
6867 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6868 continue;
6869 }
6870 }
6871
6872 /*
6873 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6874 * indent from
6875 * char *usethis = "bla\
6876 * bla",
6877 * here;
6878 */
6879 if (terminated == ',')
6880 {
6881 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6882 {
6883 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6884 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6885 break;
6886 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6887 }
6888 }
6889
6890 /*
6891 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6892 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6893 */
6894 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6895 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6896
6897 /*
6898 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6899 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6900 * while (not)
6901 * -> {
6902 * }
6903 */
6904 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6905 && theline[0] == '{')
6906 {
6907 amount = cur_amount;
6908 /*
6909 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6910 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6911 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6912 * { 1, 2 },
6913 * -> { 3, 4 }
6914 */
6915 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6916 amount += ind_open_extra;
6917
6918 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6919 {
6920 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6921 * class declaration or initialization */
6922 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6923 continue;
6924 }
6925 break;
6926 }
6927
6928 /*
6929 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6930 * Also allow " } else".
6931 */
6932 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6933 {
6934 /*
6935 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6936 * with the last one.
6937 * if (cond)
6938 * 100 +
6939 * -> here;
6940 */
6941 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6942 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6943 {
6944 if (cont_amount > 0)
6945 amount = cont_amount;
6946 else
6947 amount += ind_continuation;
6948 break;
6949 }
6950
6951 /*
6952 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6953 * are finished.
6954 * while (not)
6955 * -> here;
6956 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6957 * before this is terminated.
6958 * yyy;
6959 * if (stat)
6960 * while (not)
6961 * xxx;
6962 * -> here;
6963 */
6964 amount = cur_amount;
6965 if (theline[0] == '{')
6966 amount += ind_open_extra;
6967 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6968 {
6969 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6970 break;
6971 }
6972
6973 /*
6974 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6975 * do, line up with the while()
6976 * do
6977 * x = 1;
6978 * -> here
6979 */
6980 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6981 if (cin_isdo(l))
6982 {
6983 if (whilelevel == 0)
6984 break;
6985 --whilelevel;
6986 }
6987
6988 /*
6989 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6990 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6991 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
6992 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6993 */
6994 if (cin_iselse(l)
6995 && whilelevel == 0
6996 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6997 == NULL
6998 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6999 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7000 break;
7001 }
7002
7003 /*
7004 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7005 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7006 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7007 * the line before this one.
7008 */
7009 else
7010 {
7011 /*
7012 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7013 * the last one.
7014 * c = 99 +
7015 * 100 +
7016 * -> here;
7017 */
7018 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7019 {
7020 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7021 if (terminated == ',')
7022 amount += ind_continuation;
7023 break;
7024 }
7025
7026 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7027 {
7028 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7029 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7030 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7031 * opening brace or we are looking just for
7032 * enumerations/initializations. */
7033 if (terminated == ',')
7034 {
7035 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7036 break;
7037
7038 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7039 continue;
7040 }
7041
7042 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7043 * reduce indent. */
7044 if (amount > cur_amount)
7045 amount = cur_amount;
7046 }
7047 else
7048 {
7049 /*
7050 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7051 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7052 * 100 +
7053 * -> here;
7054 */
7055 amount = cur_amount;
7056
7057 /*
7058 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7059 * are in an initialization or enum
7060 * struct xxx =
7061 * {
7062 * sizeof a,
7063 * 124 };
7064 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7065 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7066 * yet.
7067 */
7068 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7069 {
7070 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7071 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7072 }
7073 else
7074 {
7075 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7076 && *l != NUL
7077 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7078 /* XXX */
7079 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7080 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7081 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7082 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7083 }
7084 }
7085 }
7086 }
7087
7088 /*
7089 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7090 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7091 */
7092 /* XXX */
7093 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7094 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7095 {
7096 /*
7097 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7098 * with the last one.
7099 * while (cond);
7100 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7101 * -> here;
7102 */
7103 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7104 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7105 {
7106 if (cont_amount > 0)
7107 amount = cont_amount;
7108 else
7109 amount += ind_continuation;
7110 break;
7111 }
7112
7113 if (whilelevel == 0)
7114 {
7115 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7116 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7117 if (theline[0] == '{')
7118 amount += ind_open_extra;
7119 }
7120 ++whilelevel;
7121 }
7122
7123 /*
7124 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7125 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7126 * indent of that other statement.
7127 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7128 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7129 */
7130 else
7131 {
7132 /*
7133 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7134 * may be lined up with the case label.
7135 */
7136 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7137 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7138 {
7139 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7140 continue;
7141 }
7142
7143 /*
7144 * Handle "do {" line.
7145 */
7146 if (whilelevel > 0)
7147 {
7148 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7149 if (cin_isdo(l))
7150 {
7151 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7152 --whilelevel;
7153 continue;
7154 }
7155 }
7156
7157 /*
7158 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7159 * the amount for a continuation line.
7160 * x = 1;
7161 * y = foo +
7162 * -> here;
7163 * or
7164 * int x = 1;
7165 * int foo,
7166 * -> here;
7167 */
7168 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7169 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7170 {
7171 if (cont_amount > 0)
7172 amount = cont_amount;
7173 else
7174 amount += ind_continuation;
7175 break;
7176 }
7177
7178 /*
7179 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7180 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7181 * x = 1; x = 1;
7182 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7183 * while (asdf) ->here;
7184 * here;
7185 * ->foo;
7186 */
7187 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7188 {
7189 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7190 break;
7191 }
7192
7193 /*
7194 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7195 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7196 * a terminated line.
7197 */
7198 else
7199 {
7200 /*
7201 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7202 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7203 * the line. Helps for:
7204 * func(asdr,
7205 * asdfasdf);
7206 * here;
7207 */
7208term_again:
7209 l = ml_get_curline();
7210 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7211 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7212 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7213 {
7214 /*
7215 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7216 * handled above.
7217 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7218 * asdf)
7219 */
7220 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7221 l = ml_get_curline();
7222 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7223 {
7224 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7225 continue;
7226 }
7227 }
7228
7229 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7230 * with a statement after it.
7231 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7232 * stat;
7233 * }
7234 * case 2:
7235 * stat;
7236 * }
7237 */
7238 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7239
7240 /*
7241 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7242 * ignoring any jump label.
7243 */
7244 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7245 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7246
7247 if (theline[0] == '{')
7248 amount += ind_open_extra;
7249 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7250 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7251 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7252 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7253
7254 /*
7255 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7256 * that block.
7257 */
7258 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7259 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7260 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7261 != NULL) /* XXX */
7262 {
7263 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7264 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7265 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7266 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7267 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7268 goto term_again;
7269 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7270 }
7271 }
7272 }
7273 }
7274 }
7275 }
7276
7277 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7278 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7279 amount += ind_comment;
7280 }
7281
7282 /*
7283 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7284 *
7285 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7286 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7287 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7288 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7289 */
7290 else
7291 {
7292 /*
7293 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7294 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7295 * of a function
7296 */
7297
7298 if (theline[0] == '{')
7299 {
7300 amount = ind_first_open;
7301 }
7302
7303 /*
7304 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7305 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7306 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7307 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7308 */
7309 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7310 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7311 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7312 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7313 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7314 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7315 {
7316 amount = ind_func_type;
7317 }
7318 else
7319 {
7320 amount = 0;
7321 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7322
7323 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7324
7325 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7326 {
7327 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7328 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7329
7330 l = ml_get_curline();
7331
7332 /*
7333 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7334 */ /* XXX */
7335 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7336 {
7337 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7338 continue;
7339 }
7340
7341 /*
7342 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7343 * initialization?
7344 */ /* XXX */
7345 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7346 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7347 {
7348 if (col == 0)
7349 {
7350 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7351 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7352 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7353 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7354 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7355 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7356 }
7357 else
7358 {
7359 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7360 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7361 amount = (int)col;
7362 }
7363 break;
7364 }
7365
7366 /*
7367 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7368 */
7369 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7370 continue;
7371
7372 if (cin_nocode(l))
7373 continue;
7374
7375 /*
7376 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7377 * indentation:
7378 * int foo,
7379 * bar;
7380 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7381 * enum foobar
7382 * {
7383 * ...
7384 * } foo,
7385 * bar;
7386 */
7387 n = 0;
7388 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7389 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7390 {
7391 /* take us back to opening paren */
7392 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7393 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7394 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7395 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7396
7397 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7398 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7399 * char *foo = "bla\
7400 * bla",
7401 * here;
7402 */
7403 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7404 {
7405 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7406 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7407 break;
7408 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7409 }
7410
7411 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7412
7413 if (amount == 0)
7414 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7415 if (amount == 0)
7416 amount = ind_continuation;
7417 break;
7418 }
7419
7420 /*
7421 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7422 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7423 */
7424 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7425 break;
7426 l = ml_get_curline();
7427
7428 /*
7429 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7430 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7431 */
7432 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7433 break;
7434
7435 /* (matching {)
7436 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7437 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7438 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7439 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7440 */
7441 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7442 break;
7443
7444 /*
7445 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7446 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7447 * parameters.
7448 */
7449 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7450 {
7451 amount = ind_param;
7452 break;
7453 }
7454
7455 /*
7456 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7457 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7458 * int foo,
7459 * bar;
7460 * indent_to_0 here;
7461 */
7462 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7463 {
7464 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7465 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7466 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7467 break;
7468 l = ml_get_curline();
7469 }
7470
7471 /*
7472 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7473 * use the indent of this line.
7474 *
7475 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7476 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7477 */
7478 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7479
7480 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7481 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7482 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7483 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7484 break;
7485 }
7486
7487 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7488 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7489 amount += ind_comment;
7490
7491 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7492 * "asdfasdf\
7493 * here";
7494 * char *foo = "asdf\
7495 * here";
7496 */
7497 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7498 {
7499 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7500 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7501 {
7502 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7503 if (cur_amount > 0)
7504 amount = cur_amount;
7505 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7506 amount += ind_continuation;
7507 }
7508 }
7509 }
7510 }
7511
7512theend:
7513 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7514 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7515
7516 vim_free(linecopy);
7517
7518 if (amount < 0)
7519 return 0;
7520 return amount;
7521}
7522
7523 static int
7524find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7525 int lookfor;
7526 linenr_T ourscope;
7527 int ind_maxparen;
7528 int ind_maxcomment;
7529{
7530 char_u *look;
7531 pos_T *theirscope;
7532 char_u *mightbeif;
7533 int elselevel;
7534 int whilelevel;
7535
7536 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7537 {
7538 elselevel = 1;
7539 whilelevel = 0;
7540 }
7541 else
7542 {
7543 elselevel = 0;
7544 whilelevel = 1;
7545 }
7546
7547 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7548
7549 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7550 {
7551 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7552 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7553
7554 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7555 if (cin_iselse(look)
7556 || cin_isif(look)
7557 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7558 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7559 {
7560 /*
7561 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7562 * we must be out of scope...
7563 */
7564 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7565 if (theirscope == NULL)
7566 break;
7567
7568 /*
7569 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7570 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7571 * out of luck too.
7572 */
7573 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7574 break;
7575
7576 /*
7577 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7578 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7579 * different scope...
7580 */
7581 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7582 continue;
7583
7584 /*
7585 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7586 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7587 * increment elselevel
7588 */
7589 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7590 if (cin_iselse(look))
7591 {
7592 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7593 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7594 ++elselevel;
7595 continue;
7596 }
7597
7598 /*
7599 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7600 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7601 */
7602 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7603 {
7604 ++whilelevel;
7605 continue;
7606 }
7607
7608 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7609 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7610 if (cin_isif(look))
7611 {
7612 elselevel--;
7613 /*
7614 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7615 * get in the way.
7616 */
7617 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7618 whilelevel = 0;
7619 }
7620
7621 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7622 if (cin_isdo(look))
7623 whilelevel--;
7624
7625 /*
7626 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7627 * this must be the if that we want!
7628 * match the indent level of that if.
7629 */
7630 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7631 {
7632 return OK;
7633 }
7634 }
7635 }
7636 return FAIL;
7637}
7638
7639# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7640/*
7641 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7642 */
7643 int
7644get_expr_indent()
7645{
7646 int indent;
7647 pos_T pos;
7648 int save_State;
7649
7650 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7651 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7652 ++sandbox;
7653 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7654 --sandbox;
7655
7656 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7657 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7658 * command. */
7659 save_State = State;
7660 State = INSERT;
7661 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7662 check_cursor();
7663 State = save_State;
7664
7665 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7666 if (indent < 0)
7667 indent = get_indent();
7668
7669 return indent;
7670}
7671# endif
7672
7673#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7674
7675#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7676
7677static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7678
7679 static int
7680lisp_match(p)
7681 char_u *p;
7682{
7683 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7684 int len;
7685 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7686
7687 while (*word != NUL)
7688 {
7689 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7690 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7691 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7692 return TRUE;
7693 }
7694 return FALSE;
7695}
7696
7697/*
7698 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7699 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7700 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7701 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7702 *
7703 * TODO:
7704 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7705 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7706 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7707 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7708 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7709 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007710 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7711 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007712 */
7713 int
7714get_lisp_indent()
7715{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007716 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007717 int amount;
7718 char_u *that;
7719 colnr_T col;
7720 colnr_T firsttry;
7721 int parencount, quotecount;
7722 int vi_lisp;
7723
7724 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7725 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7726
7727 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7728 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7729
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007730 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7731 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7732 else
7733 {
7734 paren = *pos;
7735 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7736 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7737 pos = &paren;
7738 }
7739 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007740 {
7741 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7742 * line that is at the same () level. */
7743 amount = -1;
7744 parencount = 0;
7745
7746 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7747 {
7748 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7749 continue;
7750 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7751 {
7752 if (*that == ';')
7753 {
7754 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7755 ++that;
7756 continue;
7757 }
7758 if (*that == '\\')
7759 {
7760 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7761 ++that;
7762 continue;
7763 }
7764 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7765 {
7766 that++;
7767 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7768 ++that;
7769 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007770 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007771 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007772 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007773 --parencount;
7774 }
7775 if (parencount == 0)
7776 {
7777 amount = get_indent();
7778 break;
7779 }
7780 }
7781
7782 if (amount == -1)
7783 {
7784 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7785 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7786 col = pos->col;
7787
7788 that = ml_get_curline();
7789
7790 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7791 amount = 2;
7792 else
7793 {
7794 amount = 0;
7795 while (*that && col)
7796 {
7797 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7798 col--;
7799 }
7800
7801 /*
7802 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7803 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7804 *
7805 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7806 * (...)) of (...))
7807 */
7808
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007809 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7810 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007811 amount += 2;
7812 else
7813 {
7814 that++;
7815 amount++;
7816 firsttry = amount;
7817
7818 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7819 {
7820 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7821 ++that;
7822 }
7823
7824 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7825 {
7826 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7827 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007828 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007829 firsttry++;
7830
7831 parencount = 0;
7832 quotecount = 0;
7833
7834 if (vi_lisp
7835 || (*that != '"'
7836 && *that != '\''
7837 && *that != '#'
7838 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7839 {
7840 while (*that
7841 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7842 || quotecount
7843 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007844 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007845 && !quotecount
7846 && !parencount
7847 && vi_lisp)))
7848 {
7849 if (*that == '"')
7850 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007851 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7852 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007853 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007854 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7855 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007856 --parencount;
7857 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7858 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7859 (colnr_T)amount);
7860 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7861 (colnr_T)amount);
7862 }
7863 }
7864 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7865 {
7866 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7867 that++;
7868 }
7869 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7870 amount = firsttry;
7871 }
7872 }
7873 }
7874 }
7875 }
7876 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007877 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007878
7879 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7880
7881 return amount;
7882}
7883#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7884
7885 void
7886prepare_to_exit()
7887{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007888#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7889 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7890 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7891 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007892 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7893#endif
7894
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007895#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7896 if (gui.in_use)
7897 {
7898 gui.dying = TRUE;
7899 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7900 }
7901 else
7902#endif
7903 {
7904 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7905
7906 /*
7907 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7908 * screen (if there are two screens).
7909 */
7910 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7911#ifdef WIN3264
7912 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7913#endif
7914 stoptermcap();
7915 out_flush();
7916 }
7917}
7918
7919/*
7920 * Preserve files and exit.
7921 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7922 */
7923 void
7924preserve_exit()
7925{
7926 buf_T *buf;
7927
7928 prepare_to_exit();
7929
7930 out_str(IObuff);
7931 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7932 out_flush();
7933
7934 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7935
7936 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7937 {
7938 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7939 {
7940 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7941 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7942 out_flush();
7943 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7944 break;
7945 }
7946 }
7947
7948 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7949
7950 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7951
7952 getout(1);
7953}
7954
7955/*
7956 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7957 */
7958 int
7959vim_fexists(fname)
7960 char_u *fname;
7961{
7962 struct stat st;
7963
7964 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7965 return FALSE;
7966 return TRUE;
7967}
7968
7969/*
7970 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7971 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7972 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7973 * time, because it can be a system call.
7974 */
7975
7976#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7977# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7978# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7979# else
7980# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7981# endif
7982#endif
7983
7984static int breakcheck_count = 0;
7985
7986 void
7987line_breakcheck()
7988{
7989 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7990 {
7991 breakcheck_count = 0;
7992 ui_breakcheck();
7993 }
7994}
7995
7996/*
7997 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7998 */
7999 void
8000fast_breakcheck()
8001{
8002 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8003 {
8004 breakcheck_count = 0;
8005 ui_breakcheck();
8006 }
8007}
8008
8009/*
8010 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8011 * 'wildignore'.
8012 */
8013 int
8014expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8015 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8016 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8017 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8018 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8019 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
8020{
8021 int retval;
8022 int i, j;
8023 char_u *p;
8024 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
8025
8026 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8027
8028 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8029 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8030 return retval;
8031
8032#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8033 /*
8034 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8035 */
8036 if (*p_wig)
8037 {
8038 char_u *ffname;
8039
8040 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
8041 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8042 {
8043 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8044 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
8045 break;
8046# ifdef VMS
8047 vms_remove_version(ffname);
8048# endif
8049 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8050 {
8051 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8052 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8053 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8054 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8055 --*num_file;
8056 --i;
8057 }
8058 vim_free(ffname);
8059 }
8060 }
8061#endif
8062
8063 /*
8064 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8065 */
8066 if (*num_file > 1)
8067 {
8068 non_suf_match = 0;
8069 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8070 {
8071 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8072 {
8073 /*
8074 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8075 * of the list.
8076 */
8077 p = (*file)[i];
8078 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8079 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8080 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8081 }
8082 }
8083 }
8084
8085 return retval;
8086}
8087
8088/*
8089 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8090 */
8091 int
8092match_suffix(fname)
8093 char_u *fname;
8094{
8095 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8096 char_u *setsuf;
8097#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8098 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8099
8100 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8101 setsuflen = 0;
8102 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8103 {
8104 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8105 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8106 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8107 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8108 break;
8109 setsuflen = 0;
8110 }
8111 return (setsuflen != 0);
8112}
8113
8114#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8115
8116# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8117static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8118static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8119# endif
8120
8121# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8122/*
8123 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8124 * it's shared between these systems.
8125 */
8126# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8127# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8128# else
8129# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8130# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8131# endif
8132# endif
8133
8134/*
8135 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8136 */
8137 static int _cdecl
8138pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8139{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008140 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008141}
8142
8143# ifndef WIN3264
8144 static void
8145namelowcpy(
8146 char_u *d,
8147 char_u *s)
8148{
8149# ifdef DJGPP
8150 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8151 while (*s)
8152 *d++ = *s++;
8153 else
8154# endif
8155 while (*s)
8156 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8157 *d = NUL;
8158}
8159# endif
8160
8161/*
8162 * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
8163 * in `path'. Called by expand_wildcards().
8164 * Return the number of matches found.
8165 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8166 * at "path[wildoff]".
8167 */
8168 static int
8169dos_expandpath(
8170 garray_T *gap,
8171 char_u *path,
8172 int wildoff,
8173 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8174{
8175 char_u *buf;
8176 char_u *path_end;
8177 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8178 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8179 int ok;
8180#ifdef WIN3264
8181 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8182 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8183# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8184 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8185 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8186# endif
8187#else
8188 struct ffblk fb;
8189#endif
8190 int matches;
8191 int starts_with_dot;
8192 int len;
8193 char_u *pat;
8194 regmatch_T regmatch;
8195 char_u *matchname;
8196
8197 /* make room for file name */
8198 buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8199 if (buf == NULL)
8200 return 0;
8201
8202 /*
8203 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8204 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8205 */
8206 p = buf;
8207 s = buf;
8208 e = NULL;
8209 path_end = path;
8210 while (*path_end != NUL)
8211 {
8212 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8213 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8214 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8215 *p++ = *path_end++;
8216 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8217 {
8218 if (e != NULL)
8219 break;
8220 s = p + 1;
8221 }
8222 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8223 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8224 e = p;
8225#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8226 if (has_mbyte)
8227 {
8228 len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
8229 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8230 p += len;
8231 path_end += len;
8232 }
8233 else
8234#endif
8235 *p++ = *path_end++;
8236 }
8237 e = p;
8238 *e = NUL;
8239
8240 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8241 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8242 * component. */
8243 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8244 if (rem_backslash(p))
8245 {
8246 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8247 --e;
8248 --s;
8249 }
8250
8251 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8252 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8253 if (pat == NULL)
8254 {
8255 vim_free(buf);
8256 return 0;
8257 }
8258
8259 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8260 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8261 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8262 vim_free(pat);
8263
8264 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8265 {
8266 vim_free(buf);
8267 return 0;
8268 }
8269
8270 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8271 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8272
8273 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8274 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8275#ifdef WIN3264
8276# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8277 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8278 {
8279 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8280 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8281 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8282 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8283 if (wn != NULL)
8284 {
8285 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8286 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8287 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8288 {
8289 vim_free(wn);
8290 wn = NULL;
8291 }
8292 }
8293 }
8294
8295 if (wn == NULL)
8296# endif
8297 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8298 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8299#else
8300 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8301 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8302 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8303#endif
8304
8305 while (ok)
8306 {
8307#ifdef WIN3264
8308# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8309 if (wn != NULL)
8310 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8311 else
8312# endif
8313 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8314#else
8315 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8316#endif
8317 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8318 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8319 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8320 && (matchname == NULL
8321 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8322 {
8323#ifdef WIN3264
8324 STRCPY(s, p);
8325#else
8326 namelowcpy(s, p);
8327#endif
8328 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8329 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8330 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8331 {
8332 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8333 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8334 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8335 }
8336 else
8337 {
8338 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8339 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8340 if (*path_end != 0)
8341 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8342 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8343 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8344 }
8345 }
8346
8347#ifdef WIN3264
8348# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8349 if (wn != NULL)
8350 {
8351 vim_free(p);
8352 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8353 }
8354 else
8355# endif
8356 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8357#else
8358 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8359#endif
8360
8361 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8362 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8363 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8364 {
8365 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8366#ifdef WIN3264
8367 FindClose(hFind);
8368# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8369 if (wn != NULL)
8370 {
8371 vim_free(wn);
8372 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8373 if (wn != NULL)
8374 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8375 }
8376 if (wn == NULL)
8377# endif
8378 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8379 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8380#else
8381 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8382 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8383#endif
8384 vim_free(matchname);
8385 matchname = NULL;
8386 }
8387 }
8388
8389#ifdef WIN3264
8390 FindClose(hFind);
8391# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8392 vim_free(wn);
8393# endif
8394#endif
8395 vim_free(buf);
8396 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8397 vim_free(matchname);
8398
8399 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8400 if (matches > 0)
8401 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8402 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8403 return matches;
8404}
8405
8406 int
8407mch_expandpath(
8408 garray_T *gap,
8409 char_u *path,
8410 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8411{
8412 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8413}
8414# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8415
8416/*
8417 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8418 *
8419 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8420 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8421 *
8422 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8423 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8424 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8425 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8426 */
8427 int
8428gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8429 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8430 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8431 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8432 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8433 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8434{
8435 int i;
8436 garray_T ga;
8437 char_u *p;
8438 static int recursive = FALSE;
8439 int add_pat;
8440
8441 /*
8442 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8443 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8444 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8445 * return FAIL.
8446 */
8447 if (recursive)
8448#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8449 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8450#else
8451 return FAIL;
8452#endif
8453
8454#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8455 /*
8456 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8457 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8458 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8459 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8460 */
8461 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8462 {
8463 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8464# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8465 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8466# endif
8467 )
8468 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8469 }
8470#endif
8471
8472 recursive = TRUE;
8473
8474 /*
8475 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8476 */
8477 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8478
8479 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8480 {
8481 add_pat = -1;
8482 p = pat[i];
8483
8484#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8485 if (vim_backtick(p))
8486 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8487 else
8488#endif
8489 {
8490 /*
8491 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8492 */
8493 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8494 {
8495 p = expand_env_save(p);
8496 if (p == NULL)
8497 p = pat[i];
8498#ifdef UNIX
8499 /*
8500 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8501 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8502 * found file names and start all over again.
8503 */
8504 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8505 {
8506 vim_free(p);
8507 ga_clear(&ga);
8508 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8509 flags);
8510 recursive = FALSE;
8511 return i;
8512 }
8513#endif
8514 }
8515
8516 /*
8517 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8518 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8519 * the pattern.
8520 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8521 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8522 */
8523 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8524 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8525 }
8526
8527 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8528 {
8529 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8530
8531#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8532 slash_to_colon(t);
8533#endif
8534 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8535 * "vim c:/" work. */
8536 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8537 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8538 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8539 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8540 vim_free(t);
8541 }
8542
8543 if (p != pat[i])
8544 vim_free(p);
8545 }
8546
8547 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8548 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8549
8550 recursive = FALSE;
8551
8552 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8553}
8554
8555# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8556
8557/*
8558 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8559 */
8560 static int
8561vim_backtick(p)
8562 char_u *p;
8563{
8564 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8565}
8566
8567/*
8568 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8569 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8570 * Returns number of file names found.
8571 */
8572 static int
8573expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8574 garray_T *gap;
8575 char_u *pat;
8576 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8577{
8578 char_u *p;
8579 char_u *cmd;
8580 char_u *buffer;
8581 int cnt = 0;
8582 int i;
8583
8584 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8585 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8586 if (cmd == NULL)
8587 return 0;
8588
8589#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8590 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8591 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8592 else
8593#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008594 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8595 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008596 vim_free(cmd);
8597 if (buffer == NULL)
8598 return 0;
8599
8600 cmd = buffer;
8601 while (*cmd != NUL)
8602 {
8603 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8604 p = cmd;
8605 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8606 ++p;
8607 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8608 if (p > cmd)
8609 {
8610 i = *p;
8611 *p = NUL;
8612 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8613 *p = i;
8614 ++cnt;
8615 }
8616 cmd = p;
8617 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8618 ++cmd;
8619 }
8620
8621 vim_free(buffer);
8622 return cnt;
8623}
8624# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8625
8626/*
8627 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8628 * EW_DIR add directories
8629 * EW_FILE add files
8630 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8631 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8632 */
8633 void
8634addfile(gap, f, flags)
8635 garray_T *gap;
8636 char_u *f; /* filename */
8637 int flags;
8638{
8639 char_u *p;
8640 int isdir;
8641
8642 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8643 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8644 return;
8645
8646#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8647 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8648 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8649 return;
8650#endif
8651
8652 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8653 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8654 return;
8655
8656 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8657 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8658 return;
8659
8660 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8661 if (p == NULL)
8662 return;
8663
8664 STRCPY(p, f);
8665#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8666 slash_adjust(p);
8667#endif
8668 /*
8669 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8670 */
8671#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8672 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8673 add_pathsep(p);
8674#endif
8675 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008676}
8677#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8678
8679#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8680
8681#ifndef SEEK_SET
8682# define SEEK_SET 0
8683#endif
8684#ifndef SEEK_END
8685# define SEEK_END 2
8686#endif
8687
8688/*
8689 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8690 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8691 */
8692 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008693get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008694 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008695 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008696 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8697{
8698 char_u *tempname;
8699 char_u *command;
8700 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8701 int len;
8702 int i = 0;
8703 FILE *fd;
8704
8705 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8706 return NULL;
8707
8708 /* get a name for the temp file */
8709 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8710 {
8711 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8712 return NULL;
8713 }
8714
8715 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008716 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008717 if (command == NULL)
8718 goto done;
8719
8720 /*
8721 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8722 * Don't check timestamps here.
8723 */
8724 ++no_check_timestamps;
8725 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8726 --no_check_timestamps;
8727
8728 vim_free(command);
8729
8730 /*
8731 * read the names from the file into memory
8732 */
8733# ifdef VMS
8734 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8735 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8736# else
8737 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8738# endif
8739
8740 if (fd == NULL)
8741 {
8742 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8743 goto done;
8744 }
8745
8746 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8747 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
8748 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8749
8750 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8751 if (buffer != NULL)
8752 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8753 fclose(fd);
8754 mch_remove(tempname);
8755 if (buffer == NULL)
8756 goto done;
8757#ifdef VMS
8758 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8759#endif
8760 if (i != len)
8761 {
8762 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8763 vim_free(buffer);
8764 buffer = NULL;
8765 }
8766 else
8767 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8768
8769done:
8770 vim_free(tempname);
8771 return buffer;
8772}
8773#endif
8774
8775/*
8776 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8777 * functions.
8778 */
8779 void
8780FreeWild(count, files)
8781 int count;
8782 char_u **files;
8783{
8784 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8785 return;
8786#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8787 /*
8788 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8789 * been used???
8790 */
8791 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8792#else
8793 while (count--)
8794 vim_free(files[count]);
8795 vim_free(files);
8796#endif
8797}
8798
8799/*
8800 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8801 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8802 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8803 */
8804 int
8805goto_im()
8806{
8807 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8808}